Casio CTX5000_3000_EN Web_CTX3000 ES 1B Web CTX3000 EN

User Manual: Casio Web_CTX3000-ES-1B CT-X5000 | Electronic Musical Instruments | Manuals | CASIO

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 157 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

EN/ES

CTX3000-ES-1B

USER’S GUIDE

Safety Precautions

Before trying to use the Digital Keyboard, be sure to read the separate “Safety Precautions”.

Please keep all information for future reference.

GUÍA DEL USUARIO

Precauciones de seguridad

Antes de intentar usar el teclado digital, asegúrese de leer las “Precauciones de seguridad” separadas.

Guarde toda la información para futuras consultas.

About Music Score data

You can use a computer to download music score data from the CASIO Website. For more information, visit the

URL below.

http://world.casio.com/

Acerca de los datos de partituras

Puede utilizar un PC para descargar los datos de partituras desde el sitio web de CASIO. Para obtener más

información, visite la siguiente URL.

http://world.casio.com/

CT-X5000

CT-X3000

This recycle mark indicates that the packaging conforms to

the environmental protection legislation in Germany.

Esta marca de reciclaje indica que el empaquetado se

ajusta a la legislación de protección ambiental en Alemania.

MA1804-B Printed in China

CTX5000_3000_es_Cover1-4.fm 1 ページ２０１８年２月１５日　木曜日　午後４時５９分

English

Important!

Please note the following important information before using this product.

• Before using the AD-E24250LW/AD-A12150LW Adaptor to power the unit, be sure to check the AC Adaptor for any damage

first. Carefully check the power cord for breakage, cuts, exposed wire and other serious damage. Never let children use an AC

adaptor that is seriously damaged.

• The product is not intended for children under 3 years.

• Use only CASIO AD-E24250LW/AD-A12150LW adaptor.

• The AC adaptor is not a toy.

• Be sure to disconnect the AC adaptor before cleaning the product.

CT-X3000 only

• Never attempt to recharge batteries.

• Do not use rechargeable batteries.

• Never mix old batteries with new ones.

• Use recommended batteries or equivalent types.

• Always make sure that positive (+) and negative (–) poles are facing correctly as indicated near the battery compartment.

• Replace batteries as soon as possible after any sign they are getting weak.

• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

Declaration of Conformity

Model Number: CT-X5000/CT-X3000

Trade Name: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.

Responsible party: CASIO AMERICA, INC.

Address: 570 MT. PLEASANT AVENUE, DOVER, NEW JERSEY 07801

Telephone number: 973-361-5400

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Manufacturer:

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.

6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan

Responsible within the European Union:

Casio Europe GmbH

Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany

www.casio-europe.com

Declaration of Conformity According to EU Directive

• Any reproduction of the contents of this manual, either in part or its entirety, is prohibited. Except for your own, personal

use, any other use of the contents of this manual without the consent of CASIO is prohibited under copyright laws.

• IN NO EVENT SHALL CASIO BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,

DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE

USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT, EVEN IF CASIO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

• The actual appearance of the product may be different from that shown in the illustrations in this User’s Guide.

• Company and product names used in this manual may be registered trademarks of others.

EN-1

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 3 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-2

General Guide EN-4

Preparing the Music Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-7

Returning the Digital Keyboard to

Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-7

Preparing a Power Supply EN-8

Using the AC Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-8

CT-X3000: Using Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-9

Turning Power On or Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-9

Adjusting Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-10

Connecting to Audio Equipment EN-11

Digital Keyboard Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-11

Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-11

Outputting Keyboard Notes to

Audio Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-12

Playing an External Device

from the Digital Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-13

CT-X5000: Outputting Sound

from a Microphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-13

Operations Common to All Modes EN-14

About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-14

Numeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-14

Other Functions of bm Number Keys . . . . . . . . . . EN-14

4 CATEGORY Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-15

Text Character Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-15

FUNCTION Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-16

Listening to Demo Play EN-17

Playing on the Keyboard EN-18

Selecting a Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-18

Sounding Multiple Tones (Layer and Split) . . . . . . EN-19

Selecting an Effect for a Tone

(Reverb, Chorus, Delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-22

Using Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-25

Using the Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-27

Sounding Arpeggio Phrases Automatically

(Arpeggiator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-27

Changing Keyboard Response to

Touch Pressure (Touch Response). . . . . . . . . . EN-29

Controlling Sounds EN-29

Using a Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-29

Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-32

Sliding Smoothly Between Pitches

(Portamento) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-32

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-33

CT-X5000: dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-33

Changing the Pitch in Semitone Steps

(Transpose) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-35

Changing the Pitch of Each Part in

Octave Units (Octave Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-35

Performing Master Digital Keyboard and

Individual Part Pitch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-37

Selecting a Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-37

Playing a Built-in Song or a Song on a

USB Flash Drive (Song Bank Mode) EN-39

Selecting a Built-in Song for Playback . . . . . . . . . .EN-39

Looping Playback of Specific Song

Measures (A-B Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-40

Playing Back with One Hand’s Part Muted. . . . . . .EN-40

Playing Back a Song from a USB Flash Drive . . . .EN-42

Playing Back an Audio File on a

USB Flash Drive (Audio Mode) EN-42

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode) EN-43

Selecting a Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-43

Using Auto Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-44

Changing Auto Accompaniment Speed (Tempo) . .EN-46

Creating a Song with an Auto Accompaniment

(Accompaniment Pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-47

Starting and Stopping Auto Accompaniment

with the Accompaniment Keyboard

(Synchro Start, Synchro Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-48

Changing Accompaniment Keyboard Settings . . . .EN-48

Advanced Split Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-50

Using Recommended Tones and Tempos

(One-Touch Presets). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-52

Adding Harmony to Melody Notes

(Auto Harmonize) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-52

Using Music Presets EN-53

Using Phrase Pads EN-54

Changing to Another Phrase Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-54

Starting and Stopping Phrase Playback . . . . . . . . .EN-55

Configuring Phrase Playback Setups . . . . . . . . . . .EN-56

Recording a Phrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-57

Configuring Phrase Recording Settings . . . . . . . . .EN-58

Managing Phrase Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-58

Editing a Phrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-59

Muting Specific Parts (Part Mode) EN-62

Turning a Part On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-62

Part On/Off Function Part Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-63

Using the Mixer EN-64

Mixer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-64

List of Parts for Each Mixer Part Group . . . . . . . . .EN-65

Advanced Mixer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-66

Registering and Restoring a Setup

(Registration) EN-67

Registering a Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-68

Recalling a Registered Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-69

Using a Pedal to Cycle Through Multiple Setups

(Registration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-70

Editing a Tone (User Tones) EN-71

Creating a User Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-71

Tone Editing Item List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-74

Contents

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 2 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-3

Contents

Creating an Auto Accompaniment

(User Rhythm) EN-76

Creating and Editing a User Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . EN-77

User Rhythm Part Playback Settings . . . . . . . . . . EN-86

Operations Affecting All the Accompaniment

Patterns in a Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-88

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record EN-90

Starting a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-91

Recording Keyboard Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-92

Re-recording Part of a Recorded Track

(Overdubbing, Punch-in Recording) . . . . . . . . . EN-96

Playing Back a Recorded Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-97

Copying a Recorded Song, Deleting a

Recorded Song or Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-98

Song Editing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-99

Editing an Entire Song in Measure Units

(Song Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-99

Editing a Recorded Song in Track Units . . . . . . . EN-101

Editing a Track of a Recorded Song in

Measure Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-103

Editing a Recorded Song in Event Units

(Event Editor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-105

Inputting Notes and Chords One-by-one

(Step Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-108

Recorded Song Mixer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-111

Configuring Function Settings EN-112

Examination Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-118

Batch Deleting Data from

Digital Keyboard Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-118

USB Flash Drive EN-119

Connecting a USB Flash Drive to and

Detaching It from the Digital Keyboard . . . . . . EN-119

Formatting a USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-120

USB Flash Drive Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-121

Using a Computer to Copy General Song

Data to a USB Flash Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-123

Connecting a Computer EN-124

Connecting a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-124

MIDI Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-125

Transferring Data Between

the Digital Keyboard and a Computer . . . . . . . EN-125

Reference EN-126

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-126

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-128

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-130

DSP Effect List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-132

Digital Keyboard Sound Source Configuration

and MIDI Channel Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-144

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-146

Appendix A-1

Song List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Fingering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Chord Example List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

MIDI Implementation Chart

Included Accessories

●Music Stand

●Leaflets

• Safety Precautions

• Appendix

• Other (Warranty, etc.)

Items included as accessories are subject to change without notice.

Separately Available Accessories

• You can get information about accessories that

are separately for this product from the CASIO

catalog available from your retailer, and from the

CASIO website at the following URL.

http://world.casio.com/

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 3 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-4

• All of the illustrations in this manual show the CT-X5000.

• Some of the button names shown here include the $ mark. This indicates that you need to long-press the button to perform its

operation.

General Guide

CT-X5000 CT-X3000

1 2

3 bl

4 5 67

bo bp bq br bs bt ck

bk98

bm bn

cq crcm cp

dk dl

dt ek

dm dnct

cocncl

do dp dq dr ds

emel

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 4 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-5

General Guide

• This manual uses the numbers and names below to refer to buttons, keys, and controllers.

1P (Power) button

2VOLUME knob

3Display

4CATEGORY button

5TONE button

6RHYTHM button

7SONG BANK, $AUDIO button

8RECORD/STOP, AUDIO PLAY/STOP button

9PART, $MIXER button

bk FUNCTION, SET, $EDIT button

bl Dial

bm Number keys

bn [–], [+] keys

bo INTRO, PART SELECT button

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1, REPEAT button

bq VARIATION/FILL-IN 2, A-B button

br VARIATION/FILL-IN 3, sREW button

bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4, dFF button

bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START, kPAUSE button

ck START/STOP, PLAY/STOP button

cl SYNCHRO STOP button

cm ACCOMP, $MUSIC PRESET button

cn FREEZE button

co BANK button

cp STORE button

cq PHRASE PAD buttons

cr STOP button

cs REGISTRATION buttons

ct METRONOME, $BEAT button

dk TEMPO buttons

dl TAP TEMPO button

dm PORTAMENTO button

dn SUSTAIN button

do AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR,

$TYPE button

dp SPLIT, $SPLIT POINT button

dq UPPER LAYER, $LOWER LAYER button

dr OCTAVE button

ds TRANSPOSE buttons

dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE button

(CT-X5000 only)

ek PITCH BEND wheel

el CHORD root names

em Percussion instrument list

CT-X5000

en TONE GROUP SELECT button

eo TONE Category buttons

ep RHYTHM GROUP SELECT button

eq RHYTHM Category buttons

CT-X3000

en Tone list

eo Rhythm list

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 5 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-6

General Guide

■Back

er USB flash drive port

es USB port

et LINE OUT R, L/MONO jacks (CT-X5000 only)

fk CT-X5000: PHONES jack

CT-X3000: PHONES/OUTPUT jack*

fl MIC IN jack (CT-X5000 only)

fm MIC VOLUME knob (CT-X5000 only)

fn AUDIO IN jack

fo PEDAL1 jack

fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack

fq CT-X5000: DC 24V terminal

CT-X3000: DC 12V terminal

*In this manual, this jack is referred to as the fk PHONES jack.

eser

fk fl fm fn fo fp fqet

CT-X5000

fk fn fo fp fq

CT-X3000

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 6 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-7

General Guide

■Display

 Tone indicator

Rhythm indicator

Song Bank indicator

Music Preset indicator

Number/setting value display (left), name display (right)

Tempo, measure, beat

Keyboard part indicators

Chord name

Auto Accompaniment indicators

Mixer info display area

Registration display, event edit display

*Other Indicators

There are two ways to reset the Digital Keyboard to its default settings: a “setting reset” that initializes settings only without deleting

data, and a “factory reset” that initializes settings and deletes all data, returning the Digital Keyboard to the state it was in when it

left the factory.

For details, see “Batch Deleting Data from Digital Keyboard Memory” (page EN-118).

Preparing the Music Stand

Returning the Digital Keyboard to Its Factory Default Settings

 



** *

Music stand

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 7 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-8

Your Digital Keyboard uses an AC adaptor for power.

• Though the CT-X3000 supports battery operation, use of

an AC adaptor is generally recommended.

Make sure that you use only the AC adaptor specified for this

Digital Keyboard. Use of a different type of AC adaptor can

cause malfunction.

• Never connect the AC adaptor (JEITA Standard, with

unified polarity plug) that comes with this Digital

Keyboard to any other device besides this Digital

Keyboard. Doing so creates the risk of malfunction.

• Be sure to turn off Digital Keyboard power before

connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.

• The AC adaptor will become warm to the touch after

very long use. This is normal and does not indicate

malfunction.

• Note the following important precautions to avoid

damage to the power cord.

During Use

• Never pull on the cord with excessive force.

• Never repeatedly pull on the cord.

• Never twist the cord at the base of the plug or connector.

During Movement

• Before moving the Digital Keyboard, be sure to unplug

the AC adaptor from the power outlet.

During Storage

• Loop and bundle the power cord, but never wind it

around the AC adaptor.

• Never insert metal, pencils, or any other objects into

the product’s DC24V (CT-X5000) or DC12V (CT-X3000)

terminal. Doing so creates the risk of accident.

• Do not try to use the power cord that comes with the

product with another device.

• Use the AC adaptor so its label surface is pointed

downwards. The AC adaptor becomes prone to

emitting electromagnetic waves when the label surface

is facing upwards.

• Plug the AC adaptor into a power outlet that is close to

the Digital Keyboard. This lets you immediately unplug

from the power outlet should any problem occur.

• The AC adaptor is intended for indoor use only. Do not

leave it in a location where it can become wet. Also, do

not place a vase or any other container of liquid on the

AC adaptor.

• Make sure that the AC adaptor does not become

covered with a newspaper, table cloth, curtain, or any

other type of fabric.

• If you do not plan to use the Digital Keyboard for a long

time, unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet.

• The AC adaptor cannot be repaired. If your AC adaptor

malfunctions or becomes damaged, you need to

purchase a new one.

• AC Adaptor Usage Environment

Temperature: 0 to 40°C

Humidify: 10% to 90%RH

• Output Polarity: &

Preparing a Power Supply

Using the AC Adaptor

CT-X5000: Connecting the AC Adaptor

Specified AC Adaptor: AD-E24250LW

(JEITA Standard plug)

CT-X3000: Connecting the AC Adaptor

Specified AC Adaptor: AD-A12150LW

(JEITA Standard plug)

Household power outlet

AC adaptor

fq DC 24V

Power cord

Household power outlet

AC adaptor

fq DC 12V

Power cord

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 8 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-9

Preparing a Power Supply

You can use six D-size batteries for power.

• Be sure to turn off power before loading batteries.

• It is up to you to prepare six commercially available

batteries. Do not use oxyride batteries or any other

nickel based batteries.

Open the battery cover on the bottom of the

Digital Keyboard.

Load six D-size batteries into the battery

compartment.

• Make sure the positive + and negative - ends of the

batteries are facing as shown in the illustration.

Insert the tabs of the battery cover into the

holes on the side of the battery compartment,

and close the cover.

■Low Battery Indication

The indicators shown below start to flash to let you know

when battery power is low. Replace the batteries with new

ones.

Connect the Digital Keyboard to a power

supply.

• See “Using the AC Adaptor” (page EN-8) or

“CT-X3000: Using Batteries” (page EN-9).

Press 1P (power) to turn on power.

•Use 2VOLUME to adjust volume.

To turn off power, hold down 1P (power)

again.

The message “Bye” will appear on the display and then

power will turn off.

• If you press 1P (power) only lightly, the display will

light up momentarily but power will not turn on. This

does not indicate malfunction. Press 1P (power)

firmly and completely to turn on power.

• Turning off the Digital Keyboard causes most current

settings to be cleared. While Auto Resume function

(page EN-10) is turned on, most settings are retained

even when power is turned off.

• Never try to perform any operation while the “Wait...”

or “Bye” message is displayed. The “Wait...” or “Bye”

message indicates that an internal data save operation

is being performed. Turning off the Digital Keyboard

can cause Digital Keyboard data to be deleted or

become corrupted.

• Pressing 1P (power) to turn off power actually puts the

Digital Keyboard into a standby state. Minute amounts of

current continue to flow within the Digital Keyboard in the

standby state. If you do not plan to use the Digital Keyboard

for a long time or if there is a lightning storm in your area,

be sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet.

If you do not perform any operation on the Digital Keyboard

for about 30 minutes, power will turn off automatically.

• You can disable Auto Power Off to ensure that power is not

turned off automatically during a concert, etc.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function

settings with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112)

and disable the following setting: Other (Other) 3 Auto

Power Off (AutoOff) (page EN-117).

CT-X3000: Using Batteries

Tabs

Low battery indicators (flash)

Turning Power On or Off

Auto Power Off

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 9 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Preparing a Power Supply

EN-10

While Auto Resume is turned on, the current settings of the

items described below are retained even when power is

turned off (as long as power continues to be supplied to the

Digital Keyboard, and power is turned off normally by pressing

1P (power) or by triggering of Auto Power Off).

●Current settings of the items below

Tone (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2),

Rhythm, Song number, Music Preset number, Tempo,

Transpose, Octave Shift, [ACCOMP] indicator displayed/

not displayed status

●On/off status of the functions below

Split, Layer, Portamento, Sustain, Auto Harmonize or

Arpeggiator, CT-X5000: Modulation/Assignable*1, Part

Mode

●Function setting*2 (page EN-112) status

●Mixer (page EN-64) setting status

●CT-X5000: Category selection, tone and rhythm

category selection status, last selected tone/rhythm in

each tone/rhythm category

*1 When the setting configured with the following operation is

“2 Toggle”: MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE (Mod/Asgn) 3

Button operation (Btn Act) (page EN-114).

*2 Including Reverb, Chorus, Delay, and other effect settings

included in the function settings.

The next time power is turned on, the Digital Keyboard is

returned to its setup state when power was last turned off.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and turn on

Auto Resume: Other (Other) 3 Auto Resume (AtResume)

(page EN-117).

• Regardless of Auto Resume is on or off, the settings of the

items below, which are included in function settings (page

EN-112), are retained even when power is turned off (as

long as power continues to be supplied to the Digital

Keyboard, and power is turned off normally by pressing

1P (power) or by triggering of Auto Power Off).

Equalizer, Tuning, Registration Memory Freeze Target,

Pedal 2 type, Expression pedal calibration, Tap rhythm

start, Examination Mode, Display contrast

• Auto Resume does not restore the status of the setting

items below.

Note value setting, Phrase recording setting, Synchro

standby, Audio Mode file selection and playback state,

Local control setting.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Press the [1] (V) bm number key to display

“Other”.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Contrast”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Auto Resume Adjusting Display Contrast

Other

Contrast

Current setting value

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 10 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-11

Your Digital Keyboard outputs audio from its built-in speakers

and/or the PHONES jack. (CT-X5000: Also outputs audio

from the LINE OUT jacks.)

• There will be an indicator mark next to [SPEAKER] while

built-in speaker output is enabled.

• There will be no indicator mark next to [SPEAKER] while

built-in speaker output is disabled.

Built-in speaker output is disabled in the cases described

below.

– When there is a plug in the PHONES jack.*

– When the following setting is disabled (Off): Speakers

(Speaker) 3 Speaker on/off (Enabled) (page EN-117).

• The Digital Keyboard automatically adjusts the sound to

make it suitable for headphones (or, in the case of the CT-

X5000, the LINE OUT jacks) while speaker output is

disabled, and for speakers while speaker output is enabled.

*When the following setting is disabled (Off): Speakers

(Speaker) 3 Enabled when PHONES connected

(PhoneSpk) (page EN-117).

• If there is no sound output even though there is an

indicator mark next to [SPEAKER], check the current

settings of the 2VOLUME knob and/or volume

related settings.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Speakers (Speaker) 3 Speaker on/off

(Enabled) (page EN-117).

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and enable

the following setting: Speakers (Speaker) 3 Enabled when

PHONES connected (PhoneSpk) (page EN-117). This will

leave speaker output enabled even if there is a plug in the

PHONES jack.

Using headphones normally cuts off* output from the built-in

speakers, which means you can practice playing even late at

night without disturbing others.

*When the following setting is disabled (Off): Speakers

(Speaker) 3 Enabled when PHONES connected

(PhoneSpk) (page EN-117).

• Before connecting headphones, be sure to use

2VOLUME to turn the volume down to a low level.

After connecting, you can adjust the volume to the

level you want.

• Do not listen to very high volume output over

headphones for long period. Doing so creates the risk

of hearing damage.

• If you are using headphones that require an adaptor

plug, make sure you do not leave the adaptor plugged

in when removing the headphones.

• Headphones do not come with the Digital Keyboard. Use

commercially available headphones. See page EN-3 for

information about options.

Connecting to Audio

Equipment

Digital Keyboard Audio Output

To enable and disable speaker output

To output from the speakers while

headphones are connected

Lights

Using Headphones

fk PHONES jack

(Stereo standard jack (6.3mm))

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 11 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Connecting to Audio Equipment

EN-12

You can connect audio equipment or a music amplifier to the

Digital Keyboard and then play through external speakers for

more powerful volume and better sound quality.

• Turn off the external device when making connections.

After connecting, turn down the Digital Keyboard and

external device volume levels whenever turning power

on or off.

• After connecting, turn on the Digital Keyboard and then

the external device.

• If keyboard notes sound distorted when they are

sounded from external audio equipment, lower the

Digital Keyboard’s volume setting.

Connection requires commercially available connecting cords,

supplied by you.

• The connecting cords should have a stereo standard plug

on one end and a plug that matches the configuration of the

external device on the other end.

Connection requires commercially available connecting cords,

supplied by you.

■Connecting to Audio Equipment (Figure )

Use commercially available cables to connect the external

audio equipment to the Digital Keyboard’s LINE OUT jacks as

shown in Figure . LINE OUT R jack output is right channel

sound, while LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is left channel

sound. It is up to you to purchase connecting cables like the

ones shown in the illustration for connection of audio

equipment. Normally in this configuration you must set the

audio equipment’s input selector to the setting that specifies

the terminal (such as AUX IN) to which the Digital Keyboard is

connected.

■Connecting to a Musical Instrument Amplifier

(Figure )

Use commercially available cables to connect the amplifier to

the Digital Keyboard’s LINE OUT jacks as shown in Figure

. LINE OUT R jack output is right channel sound, while

LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is left channel sound.

Connecting to the LINE OUT L/MONO jack only outputs a

mixture of both channels. It is up to you to purchase a

connecting cable like the one shown in the illustration for

connection of the amplifier.

Outputting Keyboard Notes to

Audio Equipment

To connect an external device to the Digital

Keyboard’s PHONES jack

fk PHONES jack (Stereo standard jack (6.3mm))

Stereo standard plug

Audio equipment, amplifier,

etc.

CT-X5000: To connect an external device to

the Digital Keyboard’s LINE OUT jacks

INPUT 1

INPUT 2





Guitar amplifier

Keyboard amplifier, etc.

RIGHT (Red)

LEFT (White)

Pin plugs

Audio amplifier AUX IN jacks, etc.

Standard plug (6.3mm)

et LINE OUT jacks

(Standard jack (6.3mm))

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 12 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-13

Connecting to Audio Equipment

Connection requires commercially available connecting cords,

supplied by you.

• The connecting cords should have a stereo mini plug on

one end and a plug that matches the configuration of the

external device on the other end.

• Turn off the Digital Keyboard when making

connections. After connecting, turn down the Digital

Keyboard and external device volume levels whenever

turning power on or off.

• After connecting, turn on the external device and then

the Digital Keyboard.

• If notes from an external device that are played on the

Digital Keyboard sound distorted, lower the volume

setting of the external device.

Enabling Vocal Cut cuts (mutes or minimizes) the vocal in the

sound being input from the AUDIO IN jack. Note that this

function cancels the sound in the center position of the audio,

which may (depending on how the original audio was mixed)

end up canceling something else other than the vocal part.

How vocal cut is performed depends on the sound being

input.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Other (Other) 3 Audio In Center Cancel

(AIn CCan) (page EN-117).

• Digital Keyboard built-in effects (reverb, chorus, delay,

DSP) are not applied to AUDIO IN jack input.

You can connect a commercially available microphone* to the

MIC IN jack and output the sound from the microphone

through the Digital Keyboard’s speakers.

*Use a dynamic microphone.

You can adjust the volume level of microphone input with

fm MIC VOLUME. Microphone volume control is

independent from overall keyboard volume.

• Before connecting a microphone, make sure that the

Digital Keyboard and microphone are turned off.

• Before connecting, set both 2VOLUME and fm MIC

VOLUME to low levels. Adjust volume settings to

appropriate levels after connecting the microphone.

• Microphone input is disabled during demo play.

You can use the Mixer to make individual adjustments to the

reverb, chorus, and delay effects that are applied to

microphone input.

See “Using the Mixer” (page EN-64).

Playing an External Device from

the Digital Keyboard

Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)

Stereo mini plug

fn AUDIO IN jack (Stereo mini jack (3.5mm))

Portable audio player, etc.

CT-X5000: Outputting Sound from

a Microphone

Microphone Settings

fl MIC IN jack (Standard jack (6.3mm))

fm MIC VOLUME knob

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 13 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-14

Unless otherwise specifically noted, all of the procedures in

this manual assume that the Digital Keyboard is in its initial

power on state (immediately after you turn on power). If you

run into problems with a procedure, turn keyboard power off

and back on, and then try performing the procedure again.

• Note that turning off Digital Keyboard power during a

procedure causes any pending unsaved data to be

deleted.

The [NUM] indicator on the display means that numeric input

is enabled.

Use the procedures below to input tone numbers, setting

values, etc.

■Using the bm Number Keys

When entering a number or value, input all the required digits.

The number of digits you need to input depends on what you

are inputting. For example, to input the tone number 015 (all

three digits required), input the following: [0] 3 [1] 3 [5]. In

this case, the numbers being input flash until you input the

final 5. The input value is registered (and 015 is displayed

without flashing) after you input all of the required digits.

• The range of allowable input values depends on what you

are inputting. If you attempt to input a value that is outside

an allowable range, the value will change to the value

within the range that is closest to the one you input.

• To specify a value without inputting a leading zero, enter

the desired value and then press bk FUNCTION. For

example, when inputting a three-digit tone number, the

following operation would result in input of tone number

010: [1] 3 [0] 3 bk FUNCTION.

• To discard input without finalizing it, long-press [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

■Using the bn [–] and [+] Keys

• Pressing [–] reduces the currently displayed number or

value by one, while [+] increases it by one. Holding down

either button will sequentially increase or decrease the

displayed number or value until you release the button.

Pressing both buttons at the same time will return the

number or value to its initial default or recommended

setting.

• If input of a negative value is allowed, pressing [–] while the

value is flashing on the display will add a minus sign (–) to

the left of the value. Pressing [+] while a value is flashing

changes back to a positive value.

■Using the bl Dial

You can also change a displayed number or value by rotating

the dial.

The table below describes other functions that the bm number

keys perform while the [NUM] indicator is not displayed. Some

keys also perform operations that are specific to certain

functions.

Operations Common to All

Modes

About this manual

Numeric Input

Sta

ePno

[NUM] indicator

Other Functions of bm Number

Keys

Key Main Function

[0] (NUM) Pressing this key while a setting item is one

that allows input of a value is displayed will

enable numeric input ([NUM] indicator

displayed).

[1] (V)

[3] (W)

Use these keys while a setting menu is

displayed to switch between menu items.

With some functions, these keys are used to

switch between parts in order to configure

part settings.

[2] (w)

[5] (q)

Use these keys to switch between setting

items in the Mixer Mode (page EN-64) and

when editing MIDI Recorder events (page

EN-105).

[4] (EXIT) With certain functions, pressing this key will

exit the function.

[6] (ENTER) Pressing [6] (ENTER) executes the

currently displayed menu item, and goes to

the applicable sub-menu or executes some

operation.

[7] (WRITE) Press this key to save a user tone (page

EN-71) or user rhythm (page EN-76).

[8] (INSERT)

[9] (DELETE)

Use these keys during text input (page

EN-15) to insert or delete characters.

[9] (DELETE) is also used when editing

MIDI recorder events (page EN-105).

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 14 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-15

Operations Common to All Modes

The many tones of the Digital Keyboard are divided into 20

categories to help make it possible for you to find a particular

tone quickly and easily. You can use the 4CATEGORY

button to select the last tone you selected in a category.

Under initial default settings, pressing 4CATEGORY will

select the first tone in a category.

• The example below shows how to select a tone using

4CATEGORY. Rhythms, songs, and music presets are

also divided into categories, and you can also use the

4CATEGORY button to scroll between them.

Press 5TONE.

This displays (tone indicator). You can select a tone

while the tone indicator is displayed.

Press 4CATEGORY.

This displays the letter “C”, followed by the currently

selected category number and name for a few seconds.

• After a few seconds, the tone number and tone name

will appear, and will start to flash. You can select

tones only within the current category while is

flashing. (See step 4.)

While “C” is displayed, press 4CATEGORY

to advance to the next category.

This displays the next category number and name.

• The category tone that was last selected when exited a

category (the first category tone under initial default

settings) will be selected first when you re-enter it.

• You can also use bn [–] (back) and [+] (forward) in

place of 4CATEGORY to scroll between categories.

• Pressing bn [–] and [+] at the same time will jump to

Category 1, and select the tone that was selected the

last time you exited Category 1.

To select tones only within the currently

displayed category, wait until starts to

flash, or press bk FUNCTION to make

flash.

• While is flashing, use bn [–] or [+], or the bl dial to

scroll through the tones of currently selected category.

• To select a tone in another category, press 5TONE.

This causes to stop flashing.

Press 5TONE.

While a tone name is displayed, hold down

4CATEGORY as you press bn [–] or [+].

[–] jumps to the first tone in the category before the one

where the displayed tone is located, while [+] jumps to

the first tone in the next category.

Use the procedures below to input user data names and other

text.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to move the cursor to the position where you

want to insert a character.

Press the [8] (INSERT) bm number key.

• This inserts “A” at the cursor position.

4 CATEGORY Button

To switch between tone categories

Piano

Category number Category name

To navigate between categories

Text Character Input

To insert characters

No Na

Cursor (flashing)

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 15 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-16

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to move the cursor to the position of the

character you want to change.

Use bn [–] and [+] to change the character.

• Repeat steps 1 and 2 as required.

• Input of the characters shown in the table below is

supported when saving a file to a USB flash drive.

• If you input a similarity symbol ( ), it will be displayed

as a right arrow (3).

• Input of the characters shown in the table below is

supported when saving a file to Digital Keyboard

memory.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to move the cursor to the position of the

character you want to delete.

Press the [9] (DELETE) bm number key.

The [FUNCTION] indicator is displayed or flashes when you

perform a Digital Keyboard function setting (page EN-112) or

other special setting operation. The meanings of the text that

appears along with a displayed or flashing [FUNCTION]

indicator are described below.

*Only while a setting item that is a function setting is

displayed.

The example below shows how the [FUNCTION] indicator is

displayed.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Press the [3] (W) bm number key a number of

times until “Touch” (Touch Response) is

displayed.

“Touch” is a setting item name, so the [FUNCTION]

indicator appears.

To modify characters

To delete characters

}

{

)

(

[

)

(

;

}

]

{

FUNCTION Indicator

Displayed Setting item name displayed.*

Flashing Setting of the currently displayed setting item

displayed.

Example: To configure the Touch Response

setting

Displayed

Touch

Setting value number Setting item name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 16 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-17

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

Touch Response setting value.

This operation scrolls through the available Touch

Response settings: Off, Light, Normal, and Heavy. Since

these are Touch Response settings, the [FUNCTION]

indicator flashes while they are displayed.

To return to the setting item display, press

bk FUNCTION.

This displays the [FUNCTION] indicator.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

This causes the [FUNCTION] indicator to disappear.

Press 5TONE and 6RHYTHM at the same

time.

This causes (song bank indicator) to flash on the

display and start play of the three demo songs.

• During demo play, you can use bn [–] and [+] to jump

to the beginning of the previous or next song.

• Demo song play will repeat until you perform the

operation in step 2 below.

To stop demo play, press ck PLAY/STOP or

5TONE and 6RHYTHM at the same time.

This causes the (song bank indicator) to disappear.

• If Auto Power Off is enabled, power will turn off

automatically after about 30 minutes of non-operation, even

if demo play is being performed. You can disable Auto

Power Off, if you want. Perform the procedure under “To

configure function settings with the bk FUNCTION button”

(page EN-112) and disable the following setting: Other

(Other) 3 Auto Power Off (AutoOff) (page EN-117).

Flashing

Setting value number Setting value

Listening to Demo Play

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 17 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-18

Your Digital Keyboard comes with a large collection of tones.

Select a tone and play something on the keyboard to see

what it sounds like.

Press 5TONE.

This displays (tone indicator). You can select a tone

while the tone indicator is displayed.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the tone you

want to assign to keyboard play.

• See “Numeric Input” (page EN-14) for information

about how to specify a number.

• Tones are divided into categories. You can easily find

the tone you want by going to the piano category,

organ category, etc. For more information, see

“4CATEGORY Button” (page EN-15).

• For details about tone categories and types, refer to

the separate “Appendix”.

Play something on the keyboard to hear what

your selected tone sounds like.

• Selecting a tone that is in a drum set category causes

various percussion instruments to be assigned to keyboard

keys.

■DSP Tones

The Digital Keyboard has a number of “DSP tones”, which are

tones with special effects. There will be an indicator mark next

to [DSP TONE] while a DSP tone is selected.

• You can use the eo TONE Category buttons to quickly and

easily navigate between categories.

Tone categories are divided between two groups: Group A

(L) and Group B (M). Which category (group) a eo TONE

Category button selects depends on whether or not the

indicator lamp to the left of en TONE GROUP SELECT is lit.

Press the en TONE GROUP SELECT button to

toggle between category Group A (indicator

lamp unlit) and Group B (indicator lamp lit).

To select a category, press its eo TONE

Category button.

• This causes (tone indicator) to flash on the display.

• Pressing a eo TONE Category button will select the

last selected tone in the corresponding category. While

(tone indicator) is flashing, you can select one of

the tones included in the category. To exit category

tone selection, press 5TONE. This causes to

stop flashing.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the tone you

want to assign to keyboard play.

Playing on the Keyboard

Selecting a Tone

To select a tone

Sta

ePno

Tone number Tone name

Displayed

CT-X5000: To use the TONE Category

buttons to select a category

en TONE GROUP SELECT button

eo TONE Category buttons

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 18 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-19

Playing on the Keyboard

You can split the keyboard into left and right area and assign

different tones to each area, and also layer two tones to play

at the same time. Split and layer can be used at the same

time, which means that you perform with up to four keyboard

parts (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2) at the

same time as shown in the illustration below.

■Keyboard Part Indicators

You can determine the current split/layer status by checking

the keyboard part indicators in the upper left corner of the

display. The keyboard parts whose indicators are shown will

sound when you play on the keyboard.

• You can adjust the volume level, effect intensity, and other

settings for each part. For details, see “Using the Mixer”

(page EN-64).

• If you use DSP tones for multiple parts, tone effects will be

removed and tone quality may change.

After confirming that the part indicator in the

upper left corner of the display looks like

, select a tone.

• This will be the UPPER 1 part tone.

Press dp SPLIT.

• This will display the [L1] indicator, and will move to

the right of the [L1]. This indicates you can select the

LOWER 1 part tone.

Select the tone you want to assign to

LOWER 1.

Play something on the keyboard.

• For information about how to change the tone

assigned to each part, see “To change the tones

assigned to each split/layer part” (page EN-21).

To cancel a split (return the entire keyboard to

the UPPER 1 part), press dp SPLIT.

This causes the [L1] indicator to disappear.

Sounding Multiple Tones (Layer

and Split)

LOWER 1 UPPER 1

UPPER 2

(UPPER LAYER)

LOWER 2

(LOWER LAYER)

U1 (UPPER 1) indicator

U2 (UPPER 2) indicator

L1 (LOWER 1) indicator

L2 (LOWER 2) indicator

To split the keyboard between two tones

(Split)

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 19 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Playing on the Keyboard

EN-20

Hold down dp SPLIT until “Split Pt” is

displayed.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

name of the note (the lowest note of the

desired UPPER part) where you want the split

point to be.

• You can also specify the split point by holding down

dp SPLIT and pressing the key where you want the

split point to be.

• This displays the specified current split point as shown

below.

Example: After C4 was specified as the split point

• The LOWER part keyboard specified by this operation

is also used as an accompaniment keyboard (page

EN-44).

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

• Specifying a split point puts the LOWER part keyboard and

the accompaniment keyboard in the same area. You can

also specify different areas for these two keyboards. You

can also configure a setting so the LOWER part tone does

not sound in the area where the LOWER part keyboard and

accompaniment keyboard overlap. For details, see the

“Advanced Split Settings” (page EN-50).

After confirming that the keyboard part

indicator in the upper left corner of the display

looks like , select a tone.

• This will be the UPPER 1 part tone.

Press dq UPPER LAYER.

• This will display the [U2] indicator, and will move to

the right of the [U2]. This indicates you can select the

UPPER 2 part tone.

Select the tone you want to assign to UPPER 2.

Play something on the keyboard.

• For information about how to change the tone

assigned to each part, see “To change the tones

assigned to each split/layer part” (page EN-21).

• Here, pressing dp SPLIT will enable use of the

UPPER 1 and UPPER 2 layered tones, in addition to

the LOWER 1 part created with the keyboard split.

To cancel a layer (return the entire keyboard to

the UPPER 1 part), press dq UPPER LAYER.

This causes the [U2] indicator to disappear.

To move the keyboard split point

B3 I C4

Split point note number

LOWER part keyboard (or accompaniment keyboard)

Split point note name

UPPER part keyboard

To layer two tones

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 20 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-21

Playing on the Keyboard

Perform steps 1 through 3 under “To split the

keyboard between two tones (Split)” (page

EN-19).

Perform the procedure below to layer two

UPPER part tones.

(1) Press dq UPPER LAYER and confirm that the [U2]

indicator is displayed.

(2) Select the tone you want to assign to UPPER 2.

Perform the procedure below to layer two

LOWER part tones.

(1) Long-press dq UPPER LAYER until the [L2]

indicator appears.

This displays an indicator mark next to [LOWER

LAYER].

(2) Select the tone you want to assign to LOWER 2.

Play something on the keyboard.

• For information about how to change the tone

assigned to each part, see “To change the tones

assigned to each split/layer part” (page EN-21).

• When using split and layer together, the UPPER 2 part is

called the “upper layer”, while the LOWER 2 part is called

the “lower layer”.

• To disable the upper layer only after performing steps 1

through 3 of the procedure above, press dq UPPER

LAYER and confirm that the [U2] indicator is not displayed.

To disable the lower layer only, long-press dq UPPER

LAYER (LOWER LAYER) until the [L2] indicator

disappears ([LOWER LAYER] indicator mark also

disappears).

• There will be an indicator mark next to [LOWER LAYER]

while the lower layer is enabled, regardless of whether the

keyboard is split. The mark disappears when the lower

layer is disabled.

• Pressing dp SPLIT after performing steps 1 through 3

above disables the split, so the [L1] and [L2] indicators

disappear, and the keyboard becomes layered with the

UPPER parts (UPPER 1 and UPPER 2) only.

Press 5TONE.

This displays (tone indicator).

Long-press 5TONE until moves to the

right of the keyboard part indicator (page

EN-19).

• Repeat this operation as many times as required to

move to the right of the keyboard part indicator

(U1, U2, L1, L2) of the part (UPPER 1, LOWER 1,

UPPER 2, LOWER 2) whose tone setting you want to

change.

Change the tone of the keyboard part you

selected in step 2.

• Repeat steps 2 and 3 above for each of the keyboard

parts whose tone setting you want to change.

To use split and layer together

Displayed

To change the tones assigned to each split/

layer part

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 21 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Playing on the Keyboard

EN-22

Your Digital Keyboard includes reverb, chorus, and delay

effects, which you can use to enhance the sound of tones.

●Reverb (REVERB)

Reverb simulates ambient spaces, such as a room or hall.

●Chorus (CHORUS)

Chorus adds a rich, shimmering quality to a sound. This digital

keyboard applies a preset chorus setting that is suitable for

each tone.

●Delay (DELAY)

Delay stores a sound and repeats it periodically with a slight

delay before each repeat, which creates an echo effect. Delay

is different from reverb, which creates a reverberation effect.

This digital keyboard applies a preset delay setting that is

suitable for each tone.

• You can determine the current enabled/disabled status of

each effect by checking the indicator marks on the right

side of the display.

• Preset chorus effect and delay effects are applied to each

tone even when there is no indicator mark next to

[CHORUS] and [DELAY].

• You can adjust how tone effects are applied to each part.

For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page EN-64). The

setting items that are used for adjustment correspond to the

following: Reverb Send, Chorus Send, Delay Send (see

“Advanced Mixer Settings” on page EN-66).

• The procedure below explains how to select the reverb

(steps 2 and 3), chorus (4 and 5), and delay (6 and 7)

settings. You can skip any of the steps for any effect whose

settings you don’t need to change.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Reverb”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• For information about the reverb types that correspond

to each setting value, see the “Reverb Effect List”

(page EN-23).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Chorus”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• For information about the chorus types that

correspond to each setting value, see the “Chorus

Effect List” (page EN-24).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Delay”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• For information about the delay types that correspond

to each setting value, see the “Delay Effect List”

(EN-24).

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Selecting an Effect for a Tone

(Reverb, Chorus, Delay)

To select a digital effect

Reverb

Current setting value

Cho r us

Current setting value

De l a

Current setting value

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 22 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-23

Playing on the Keyboard

■CT-X5000

■CT-X3000

Reverb Effect List

Setting

Value Setting Type Display

1Off Off

2 Room 1 Room 1

3 Room 2 Room 2

4 Room 3 Room 3

5 Room 4 Room 4

6 Room 5 Room 5

7 Room 6 Room 6

8 Room 7 Room 7

9 Room 8 Room 8

10 Room 9 Room 9

11 Large Room 1 L.Room 1

12 Large Room 2 L.Room 2

13 Hall 1 Hall 1

14 Hall 2 Hall 2

15 Hall 3 Hall 3

16 Hall 4 Hall 4

17 Hall 5 Hall 5

18 Hall 6 Hall 6

19 Hall 7 Hall 7

20 Hall 8 Hall 8

21 Hall 9 Hall 9

22 Stadium 1 Stadium1

23 Stadium 2 Stadium2

24 Stadium 3 Stadium3

25 Plate 1 Plate 1

26 Plate 2 Plate 2

27 Plate 3 Plate 3

28 Delay Delay

29 Pan Delay PanDelay

30 Long Delay 1 L.Delay1

31 Long Delay 2 L.Delay2

32 Church Church

33 Cathedral Cathedrl

Setting

Value Setting Type Display

1Off Off

2 Room 1 Room 1

3 Room 2 Room 2

4 Room 3 Room 3

5 Room 4 Room 4

6 Room 5 Room 5

7 Large Room1 L.Room 1

8 Large Room2 L.Room 2

9 Hall 1 Hall 1

10 Hall 2 Hall 2

11 Hall 3 Hall 3

12 Hall 4 Hall 4

13 Hall 5 Hall 5

14 Hall 6 Hall 6

15 Stadium 1 Stadium1

16 Stadium 2 Stadium2

17 Stadium 3 Stadium3

18 Plate 1 Plate 1

19 Plate 2 Plate 2

20 Delay Delay

21 Pan Delay PanDelay

22 Long Delay 1 L.Delay1

23 Long Delay 2 L.Delay2

24 Church Church

25 Cathedral Cathedrl

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 23 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Playing on the Keyboard

EN-24

■CT-X5000

■CT-X3000

*Though selecting setting value 1 (Tone) causes the

indicator mark next to [CHORUS] to disappear, preset

chorus effects are applied to each tone.

■CT-X5000

Chorus Effect List

Setting

Value Setting Type Display

1 Tone *Tone

2 Chorus 1 Chorus 1

3 Chorus 2 Chorus 2

4 Chorus 3 Chorus 3

5 Chorus 4 Chorus 4

6 FB Chorus FBChorus

7 Soft Chorus Soft C

8 Bright Chorus Bright C

9 Deep Chorus Deep C

10 Flanger 1 Flanger1

11 Flanger 2 Flanger2

12 Flanger 3 Flanger3

13 Flanger 4 Flanger4

14 Short Delay 1 S.Delay1

15 Short Delay 2 S.Delay2

16 Short Delay 3 S.Delay3

17 Short Delay 4 S.Delay4

Setting

Value Setting Type Display

1 Tone *Tone

2 Chorus 1 Chorus 1

3 Chorus 2 Chorus 2

4 Chorus 3 Chorus 3

5 Chorus 4 Chorus 4

6 FB Chorus FBChorus

7 Deep Chorus Deep C

8 Flanger 1 Flanger1

9 Flanger 2 Flanger2

10 Flanger 3 Flanger3

11 Flanger 4 Flanger4

12 Short Delay 1 S.Delay1

13 Short Delay 2 S.Delay2

Delay Effect List

Setting

Value Setting Type Display

1 Tone *Tone

2 Short 1 Short 1

3 Short 2 Short 2

4Echo Echo

5 Tempo Sync Short TSync S

6 Tempo Sync Middle TSync M

7 Tempo Sync Long TSync L

8 Ambience Ambience

9Mid 1 Mid 1

10 Mid 2 Mid 2

11 Long 1 Long 1

12 Long 2 Long 2

13 Mid Pan Mid Pan

14 Long Pan 1 LongPan1

15 Long Pan 2 LongPan2

16 Long Pan 3 LongPan3

17 Short Single ShrtSngl

18 Mid Single Mid Sngl

19 Long Single LongSngl

20 Long Double Long Dbl

21 Long Triple LongTrpl

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 24 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-25

Playing on the Keyboard

■CT-X3000

*Though selecting setting value 1 (Tone) causes the

indicator mark next to [DELAY] to disappear, preset delay

effects are applied to each tone.

You can use equalization to select from among presets that

boost or cut specific frequency ranges.

The CT-X5000 also includes a four-band equalizer that allows

user-configured settings (User Equalizer).

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Equalizr”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• The settings that correspond to each of the setting

values are described below.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Setting

Value Setting Type Display

1 Tone *Tone

2 Short 1 Short 1

3 Short 2 Short 2

4Echo Echo

5 Tempo Sync Short TSync S

6 Tempo Sync Middle TSync M

7 Tempo Sync Long TSync L

8 Ambience Ambience

9 Mid 1 Mid 1

10 Mid 2 Mid 2

11 Long 1 Long 1

12 Long 2 Long 2

13 Mid Pan Mid Pan

14 Long Pan 1 LongPan1

15 Long Pan 2 LongPan2

16 Long Pan 3 LongPan3

Using Equalization

To select an equalization setting

Setting

Value Display Description

1 Standard Standard setting

2 Bass + Boosts the low range.

3 Treble + Boosts the high range.

4 Loudness Boosts everything.

5 Mellow Creates a soft feeling.

6 Bright Creates a bright feeling.

7Rock Creates a sound optimized for

rock music.

8 Dance Creates a sound optimized for

dance music.

9Jazz Creates a sound optimized for

jazz music.

10 Classic Creates a sound optimized for

classical music.

11 User CT-X5000: Applies User

Equalizer settings.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 25 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Playing on the Keyboard

EN-26

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “User EQ”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Configure settings for reach frequency range.

(1) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display the menu of the range you want to adjust.

(2) Press [6] (ENTER).

• This automatically changes the “Equalizr” setting

to “User”. See “To select an equalization setting”

(page EN-25).

(3) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display “***

Freq” (Center Frequency or Cutoff Frequency) or “***

Gain” (Gain).

What appears in place of “***” in the above menu

items depends on the frequency range being

equalized.

(4) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

For details about setting values and their settings,

see the “User Equalizer Setting List” below.

(5) Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

(6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) as required to configure

the settings of other frequency ranges.

Configure input level and output level settings

as required.

(1) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Input Lv” (Input Level), and then use bn [–]

and [+] or the bl dial to change the setting value.

(2) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“OutputLv” (Output Level), and then use bn [–] and

[+] or the bl dial to change the setting value.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

■User Equalizer Setting List

*1 Setting values 1 through 13 (A in the table below)

correspond to cutoff frequencies 50 Hz to 800 Hz (B in the

table below).

*2 Setting values 1 through 20 (A in the table below)

correspond to center frequencies 100Hz to 8.0kHz (B in

the table below).

*3 Setting values 1 through 10 (A in the table below)

correspond to cutoff frequencies 2.0kHz to 16kHz (B in the

table below).

CT-X5000: To configure User Equalizer

settings

To adjust this range: Display this:

Low-range (50 Hz to 800 Hz) EQ Low

Mid-range 1 (100 Hz to 8 kHz) EQ Mid1

Mid-range 2 (100 Hz to 8 kHz) EQ Mid2

High-range (2 kHz to 16 kHz) EQ High

Setting Item Display Settings

Low-range EQ Low

Cutoff Frequency Low Freq 1 to 13 *1

Gain Low Gain –12 to 12

Mid-range 1 EQ Mid1

Center Frequency Mid1Freq 1 to 20 *2

Gain Mid1Gain –12 to 12

Mid-range 2 EQ Mid2

Center Frequency Mid2Freq 1 to 20 *2

Gain Mid2Gain –12 to 12

High-range EQ High

Cutoff Frequency HighFreq 1 to 10 *3

Gain HighGain –12 to 12

Input Level Input Lv 0 to 127

Output Level OutputLv 0 to 127

A12345

B50Hz 63Hz 80Hz 100Hz 125Hz

A6 7 8 9 10

B160Hz 200Hz 250Hz 315Hz 400Hz

A11 12 13

B500Hz 630Hz 800Hz

A12345

B100Hz 125Hz 160Hz 200Hz 250Hz

A6 7 8 9 10

B315Hz 400Hz 500Hz 630Hz 800Hz

A11 12 13 14 15

B1.0kHz 1.3kHz 1.6kHz 2.0kHz 2.5kHz

A16 17 18 19 20

B3.2kHz 4.0kHz 5.0kHz 6.3kHz 8.0kHz

A12345

B2.0kHz 2.5kHz 3.2kHz 4.0kHz 5.0kHz

A6 7 8 9 10

B6.0kHz 8.0kHz 10kHz 13kHz 16kHz

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 26 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-27

Playing on the Keyboard

The metronome sounds a regular tone to mark time. Use the

metronome when you want to practice playing at a regular

tempo.

Specify the time signature.

• You can specify a time signature numerator (0 to 16)

and denominator (4 or 8).

(1) Hold down ct METRONOME until “BeatNume” is

displayed.

(2) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the time

signature numerator setting value within the range of

0 to 16 (Default: 4).

(3) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “BeatDeno”.

(4) Use bn [–] and [+] to specify the time signature

denominator.

• The setting value 1 is (quarter note beats),

while setting value 2 is (eighth note beats).

(5) Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Use the dk TEMPO [w] and [q] buttons to

change the tempo setting.

• For information about the tempo setting, see

“Changing Auto Accompaniment Speed (Tempo)”

(page EN-46).

Press ct METRONOME.

This starts the metronome. The number of measures

since the metronome was started is indicated in the

upper right corner of the display.

To stop the metronome, press

ct METRONOME again.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Metronome (Metronom) 3 Metronome

Volume (Volume) (page EN-117).

With the arpeggiator, you can play various arpeggios and

other phrases automatically by simply pressing keys on the

keyboard. You can select from a number of different arpeggio

options, including playing arpeggios from a chord, playing

various phrases automatically, and more.

• A single button is used to control the arpeggiator and auto

harmonize (page EN-52). Because of this, auto harmonize

cannot be used while the arpeggiator is in use.

Press do AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR and confirm that the

[ARPEGGIATOR] indicator is displayed.

• Playing a chord or single notes on the keyboard will

play back the currently selected arpeggio.

Using the Metronome

To start or stop the metronome

Setting

Value Accent

2 to 16 Specifies numerator from 2 to 16. An accent

sounds on the first beat only.

1 All beats accented.

0 All beats unaccented.

Note Value

Measure

Tempo

Beat

To adjust the balance between metronome

and keyboard volume

Sounding Arpeggio Phrases

Automatically (Arpeggiator)

To turn on the arpeggiator

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 27 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Playing on the Keyboard

EN-28

To turn the arpeggiator off, press do AUTO

HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR.

This causes the [ARPEGGIATOR] indicator to disappear.

• If the [AUTO HARMONIZE] indicator is displayed

instead of the [ARPEGGIATOR] in step 1 of the above

procedure, you will need to change the function

assigned to the button.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function

settings with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112)

and select “2 Arpeg.” for the following setting: Auto

Harmonize/Arpeggiator (AHar/Arp) 3 AUTO

HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR button assignment

(BtnAsign) (page EN-114).

• Use the following procedure when you want an arpeggio

pattern to keep playing after you release the keyboard

keys.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function

settings with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112)

and enable the following setting: Auto Harmonize/

Arpeggiator (AHar/Arp) 3 Arpeggiator Hold (ArpegHld)

(page EN-114).

• While you are using split (page EN-19), you can use the

UPPER 1 part or LOWER 1 part to sound the arpeggiator.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function

settings with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112)

and change the following setting: Auto Harmonize/

Arpeggiator (AHar/Arp) 3 Arpeggiator Part (ArpegPart)

(page EN-114).

Perform the procedure under “To turn on the

arpeggiator” and confirm that the

[ARPEGGIATOR] indicator is displayed.

Long-press do AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR until the [FUNCTION] indicator

flashes on the display.

This displays the currently selected arpeggiator type

number and name.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to display the

arpeggiator type you want to select.

• While the arpeggiator type is displayed, long-pressing

do AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR will select

the tone that is recommended for the displayed type.

• For details about arpeggiator types, refer to the

separate “Appendix”.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

To select an arpeggiator type

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 28 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-29

Touch Response alters tone volume in accordance with

keyboard pressure (speed). This provides you some of the

same expressivity you get on an acoustic piano.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Touch”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• The table below shows setting values and their

corresponding Touch Response sensitivity.

• There is an indicator mark next to [TOUCH] while the

touch setting is something other than off.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Connecting a pedal lets you perform pedal operations that

add various effects during your performances. You can use a

pedal to start and stop Auto Accompaniment and Song Bank

(page EN-39) song play.

• A pedal unit does not come with the Digital Keyboard.

Purchase one separately from your retailer. See page EN-3

for information about options.

• You can also use a pedal to switch the Digital Keyboard

registration setup. For details, see “Using a Pedal to Cycle

Through Multiple Setups (Registration Sequence)” (page

EN-70).

Depending on the type of operation you want the pedal to

perform, connect the pedal’s cable either to the Digital

Keyboard’s fo PEDAL1 jack or fp PEDAL2/

EXPRESSION jack.

• You can connect a CASIO sustain pedal (“Separately

Available Accessories”, page EN-3) to the fo PEDAL1

jack. The fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack can be used to

connect a CASIO sustain pedal or a commercially available

expression pedal.

• If you use the fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack to

connect a commercially available expression pedal,

you will need to specify the polarity type of the pedal

and also calibrate the pedal before you use it.

To do this, perform the procedure under “To connect a

pedal to the fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack” (page

EN-30).

Changing Keyboard Response to

Touch Pressure (Touch

Response)

To change Touch Response sensitivity

Setting

Value

Sensitivity

(Display) Description

01 Off (Off) Touch Response is turned off.

Sound volume is fixed,

regardless of key press speed.

02 Light (Light) Strong sound, even with light

pressure

03 Normal

(Normal)

Normal Touch Response

04 Heavy

(Heavy)

Normal sound, even with strong

pressure

Controlling Sounds

Using a Pedal

Connecting a Pedal

Pedal jacks

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 29 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Controlling Sounds

EN-30

Connect a pedal to the fo PEDAL1 jack.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Cntrller”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Pedal”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Pd1Efect”. This is the Pedal 1 function

selection mode.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• For details about the function that is assigned by each

setting value, refer to the “Pedal Function List” (page

EN-31).

Turn pedal effects on or off for each keyboard

part* as required.

(1) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Pd1Enabl”.

(2) Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

(3) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display the

part whose setting you want to change.

(4) Use bn [–] and [+] to switch between on and off.

• The pedal effect is applied to parts that are turned

on, and not applied to parts that are turned off.

• The Auto Harmonize (page EN-52) sound

depends on the UPPER 1 part setting.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

*See “Sounding Multiple Tones (Layer and Split)” (page

EN-19).

Connect a pedal to the fp PEDAL2/

EXPRESSION jack.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Cntrller”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Pedal”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Pd2 Type”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

*For details, see “Connectable Expression Pedals” (page

EN-32).

• If a pedal does not work correctly after configuring

settings, it could mean that the connected pedal is not

compatible with the “Pd2 Type” setting above. Try

changing the “Pd2 Type” to a different setting and see

if this results in correct operation.

To connect a pedal to the fo PEDAL1 jack To connect a pedal to the fp PEDAL2/

EXPRESSION jack

To use this type of pedal: Select this setting:

Foot switch pedal 1 Foot Sw

Expression pedal (Type 1 polarity*) 2 ExpType1

Expression pedal (Type 2 polarity*) 3 ExpType2

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 30 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-31

Controlling Sounds

Depending on the selected pedal type, perform

one of the operations below.

YFoot Switch Pedal

Select the pedal effect.

(1) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Pd2Efect”.

(2) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• For details about pedal effects that correspond to

each setting value, see the “Pedal Function List”

(page EN-31).

YExpression Pedal

Selecting “2 ExpType1” or “3 ExpType2” in step 6 of this

procedure automatically causes “5 Exp.” (Expression) to

be selected for “Pd2Efect”. If you connect an expression

pedal to the fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack, use the

procedure below to calibrate the pedal before using it.

(1) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “ExPCalib”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

(2) Press bn [+] (YES) to start adjustment or bn [–] (NO)

to cancel the adjustment operation.

(3) While “Highest” is displayed, depress the pedal and

press [6] (ENTER).

(4) While “Lowest” is displayed, release the pedal and

press [6] (ENTER).

• The message “Complete” will appear when the

operation is complete.

• To have an expression pedal connected to the

fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack perform the

same operation (sustain, etc.) as a foot switch

pedal, perform the operation under “■ Foot Switch

Pedal” above to select a pedal effect.

Turn pedal effects on or off for each keyboard

part as required.

• Perform step 6 under “To connect a pedal to the

fo PEDAL1 jack” (page EN-30). Note, however, that

you should display “Pd2Enabl” in step (1).

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

■Pedal Function List

Setting

Value

Function

(Display) Description

1Sustain

(Sustain)

Sustains notes played while the

pedal is depressed, even if the

keyboard key is subsequently

released.

Organ and other tones that are

sustained as long as keyboard

key are depressed continue to

sound as long as the pedal is

depressed.

2 Sostenuto

(Sostenut)

Only the notes of the keys that

are depressed when the pedal

is pressed are sustained, even

if the keyboard keys are

released, until the pedal is

released.

3 Soft (Soft) Slightly lowers and softens

notes played while the pedal is

depressed.

4 Rhythm/Song

(Rhy/Song)

Starts or stops Auto

Accompaniment or song

playback.

5 Expression

(Exp.)

This function can be selected

only when “2 ExpType1” or

“3 ExpType2” is selected in step

6 of the procedure under “To

connect a pedal to the

fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION

jack” (page EN-30).

With this function, the effect is

applied in accordance with how

far the expression pedal

attached to the fp PEDAL2/

EXPRESSION jack is

depressed.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 31 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Controlling Sounds

EN-32

■Connectable Expression Pedals

You can connect a commercially available expression pedal

that satisfies the specifications below to the fp PEDAL2/

EXPRESSION jack. Use of a pedal whose operation has

been confirmed (see below) is recommended.

• Maximum resistance value: 10kΩ±20% to 50kΩ±20%

• Note that pedal polarity depends on the manufacturer. To

configure the pedal polarity type setting, perform the

procedure under “To connect a pedal to the fp PEDAL2/

EXPRESSION jack” (page EN-30).

*Operation Confirmed Pedals

Roland EV-5 (Set minimum volume to 0.)

KURZWEIL CC-1

FATAR VP-25, VP-26

Sustain extends the reverberation of a note to produce rich

resonance.

Press dn SUSTAIN.

This displays the [SUSTAIN] indicator.

• The sustain effect (note sustained even after the key is

released) is applied to notes played on the keyboard

while the [SUSTAIN] indicator is displayed.

To disable sustain, press dn SUSTAIN and

confirm that the [SUSTAIN] indicator

disappears.

• You can configure settings for the keyboard tones of each

part that control how the sustain effect is applied. Perform

the procedure under “To configure function settings with the

bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure the

following setting: Controller (Cntrller) 3 Sustain (Sustain)

(page EN-113).

Portamento makes it possible to slide smoothly between

notes as is done with string and woodwind instruments.

Press dm PORTAMENTO.

This displays the [PORTAMENTO] indicator.

• While the above indicator is displayed, sequentially

pressing two keyboard keys causes the first pitch to

slide smoothly into the next.

To disable portamento, press

dm PORTAMENTO and confirm that the

[PORTAMENTO] indicator is not displayed.

• You can configure settings for the keyboard tones of each

part that control the speed of the slide between pitches

when dm PORTAMENTO is pressed. Perform the

procedure under “To configure function settings with the

bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure the

following setting: Controller (Cntrller) 3 Portamento

(Portamnt) (page EN-113).

Exp. Pedal Type 1

Exp. Pedal Type 2*

Sustain

Sliding Smoothly Between

Pitches (Portamento)

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 32 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-33

Controlling Sounds

You can use the pitch bend wheel to slide the pitch of notes

smoothly upwards and downwards. This capability makes it

possible to reproduce saxophone and electric guitar choking

effects.

While playing a note on the

keyboard, rotate the ek PITCH

BEND wheel on the left of the

keyboard upwards or

downwards.

The amount the note bends depends on

how much you rotate the pitch bend

wheel.

• Do not touch the wheel as you turn on

the keyboard.

• You also can configure pitch bend wheel operation by

specifying the amount of pitch change at maximum rotation

in either direction. Perform the procedure under “To

configure function settings with the bk FUNCTION button”

(page EN-112) and configure the following setting:

Controller (Cntrller) 3 Pitch Bend (PitchBnd) 3 Pitch

Bend Range (Range) (page EN-113).

You can use the dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE button

to apply vibrato to notes (default setting). You can also

change the function of the button so it change how DSP

effects are applied to tones.

• The procedure below assumes that the Digital Keyboard is

configured with initial default settings.

Hold down dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE.

The button’s indicator lamp remains lit while the button is

depressed.

• Vibrato is applied keyboard plays while the indicator is

lit.

To disable the effect, release the button.

This causes the button’s indicator lamp to go out.

• You can change the intensity of the vibrato effect while the

indicator lamp is lit. Perform the procedure under “To

configure function settings with the bk FUNCTION button”

(page EN-112) and configure the following setting:

Controller (Cntrller) 3 MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE

(Mod/Asgn) 3 Value when modulation is on (ModValue)

(page EN-113).

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Cntrller”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Mod/Asgn”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Btn Act”.

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel CT-X5000: dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE button

To apply vibrato to notes

To change the operation performed when

dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE is pressed

Lit

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 33 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Controlling Sounds

EN-34

Use bn [–] and [+] to select the

dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE operation.

• The indicator lamp to the left of the button is lit when

the assigned function is enabled, and unlit when it is

disabled.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To change the

operation performed when dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE is pressed” (page EN-33).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Btn Func”.

Use bn [–] and [+] to change the function

assigned to dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE.

*For information about the setting operation see “To change

how DSP effects applied when dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE is pressed” (page EN-34).

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To change the

operation performed when dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE is pressed” (page EN-33).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “PartEnbl”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

the part whose setting you want to change.

Use the bn [–] and [+] to switch between on

and off.

• The effect is applied to parts that are turned on, and

not applied to parts that are turned off.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

• For details about keyboard parts, see “Sounding Multiple

Tones (Layer and Split)” (page EN-19).

• The DSP module registered with the procedure below are

elements of this Digital Keyboard’s DSP effect. For details

about DSP effect configuration and parameters, see “DSP

Editing” (page EN-72).

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To change the

operation performed when dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE is pressed” (page EN-33).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Btn Func”.

Use bn [–] and [+] to change the setting to

“2 DSP”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“DSPModle” (the target DSP module).

This displays a DSP module name.

To select this operation: Select this

setting value:

Enable the function assigned to the

button only while the button is pressed.

1 Moment

Toggle the function between enabled

and disabled each time the button is

pressed.

2 Toggle

To change the function assigned to

dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE

To change to this function: Select this

setting value:

Vibrato 1 Mod

Change how DSP effects are applied to

tones in accordance with user settings.*

2DSP

To specify the keyboard part to which an

effect is applied when dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE is pressed

To change how DSP effects applied when

dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE is pressed

on1B EQ

Module number DSP module name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 34 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-35

Controlling Sounds

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify a

DSP module.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “DSPParam” (the target DSP

parameter).

This displays the name of the first parameter of the DSP

module you selected in step 5.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to display the

parameter you want to change when

dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE is pressed.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“DSPValue” (value when DSP is turned on).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value applied when dt MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE is pressed.

10.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

• The assigned DSP modules depend on the tone. To check

the DSP modules for each tone, perform the procedure

under “To use DSP editing to edit an effect” (page EN-72).

The transpose feature lets you raise or lower the overall pitch

of the Digital Keyboard in semitone steps. You can use this

feature to adjust keyboard pitch to a key that better matches a

vocalist, another musical instrument, etc.

Press the ds TRANSPOSE [w] or [q] button.

This displays “Trans.”

• You can change the pitch of the keyboard within the

range of –12 to 00 to +12.

• While “Trans.” is displayed, you can use the bm

number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to change

the setting value.

• Pressing bk FUNCTION or not performing an

operation for some time causes “Trans.” to disappear.

• The [TRANSPOSE] indicator will be displayed while the

transpose setting is something other than 0 (zero).

Octave Shift lets you raise or lower the pitch of the keyboard

in octave units. You can configure individual octave shift

settings for each of the keyboard parts* (UPPER 1,

LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2).

• You can also specify the number of octaves to shift for each

part.

• With Quick Octave Shift, you can quickly shift octaves in

accordance with settings that are pre-configured for a part.

*See “Sounding Multiple Tones (Layer and Split)” (page

EN-19).

• The Octave Shift setting changes automatically when some

tones are selected. For details, refer to the “Octave Shift”

column of the tone list in the separate “Appendix”.

• The Auto Harmonize (page EN-52) sound depends on the

UPPER 1 part setting.

EQ Ga i n

Parameter number Parameter name

Changing the Pitch in Semitone

Steps (Transpose)

To change the pitch in semitone units

Changing the Pitch of Each Part

in Octave Units (Octave Shift)

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 35 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Controlling Sounds

EN-36

Press dr OCTAVE.

Number of octaves shifted. 0 (zero) indicates no

shifting, 1 indicates one octave up, and –1 indicates

one octave down. You can specify a value in the

range of –3 to +3.

Keyboard part. For details about keyboard parts and

how they are indicated, see “Keyboard Part

Indicators” (page EN-19).

Indicates the octave shift setting screen.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to select the keyboard part you want to octave

shift.

Use bn [–] and [+] to octave shift the keyboard

part you selected in step 2.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to octave shift other parts

as required.

To exit the procedure and return to the state

the Digital Keyboard was in before step 1 of

this procedure, press dr OCTAVE or the [4]

(EXIT) bm number key.

While holding down dr OCTAVE, press the

ds TRANSPOSE [w] or [q] button.

• Pressing [w] shifts the specified keyboard parts one

octave down, while [q] shifts one octave up.

• Use the Quick Octave Shift keyboard part selection

procedure below to select the parts that are affected

by a Quick Octave Shift operation.

Press dr OCTAVE.

This displays “U1 Oct.”

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Btn Trgt”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “U1OctBtn”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

the part whose setting you want to change.

Use the bn [–] and [+] to switch between on

and off.

• Selecting on causes the keyboard part’s octave to be

shifted by the Quick Octave Shift operation under “To

use Quick Octave Shift” (page EN-36).

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required for other

parts.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

To configure the octave shift amount setting

for each part

U1 Oc t .



U2 Oc t .

To use Quick Octave Shift

To select Quick Octave Shift keyboard parts

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 36 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-37

Controlling Sounds

Use the procedure below to perform master Digital Keyboard

pitch adjustment. When making adjustments, the A4 note (A

above middle C) is the tuning standard.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Tune”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “MstrTune”.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to change the setting value.

• The setting range is 415.5 to 465.9 Hz (Default: 440.0

Hz).

• Use the bm number keys to input integers.

• You can use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change

the frequency in 0.1Hz steps

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

When using layer and split, you can individually fine-tune the

pitch of each part (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2,

LOWER 2).

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following settings: Tuning (Tune) 3 Part Coarse Tune

(PrtCoars) and Part Fine Tune (Prt Fine) (page EN-115).

• Part coarse tuning changes the pitch in semitone steps,

while part fine tuning adjusts pitch in cent units.

• The Auto Harmonize (page EN-52) sound depends on the

UPPER 1 part setting.

You can select from among 17 different scales, including

those that a suitable for classical music of specific eras,

Arabian music, etc.

■Scale List

• You can fine tune the pitch of each note of the scale (from

C to B) in one-cent units. After selecting one of the preset

scales, you can modify its tuning as desired. For details,

see “To fine tune a scale (Scale Fine Tuning)” (page

EN-38).

• You can fix the scale of Auto Accompaniment as equal

temperament, regardless of the currently selected scale. To

do so, use the procedure under “To change the scale

setting used for Auto Accompaniments” to turn off the

Accompaniment Scale (AcompScl) setting (page EN-38).

Performing Master Digital

Keyboard and Individual Part

Pitch Adjustment

To fine tune a pitch (Tuning)

To fine tune the pitch of each keyboard part

(Part Coarse Tuning, Part Fine Tuning)

Selecting a Scale

No. Scale name Display

01 Equal Temperament Equal

02 Pure Major PureMajr

03 Pure Minor PureMinr

04 Pythagorean Pythagor

05 Kirnberger 3 Kirnbrg3

06 Werckmeister Wercmeis

07 Mean-Tone MeanTone

08 Rast Rast

09 Bayati Bayati

10 Hijaz Hijaz

11 Saba Saba

12 Dashti Dashti

13 Chahargah Chaharga

14 Segah Segah

15 Gurjari Todi GujrTodi

16 Chandrakauns Cndrkuns

17 Charukeshi Carukesi

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 37 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Controlling Sounds

EN-38

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Scale”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Type”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• For details about the scales that corresponds to each

setting value, see the “Scale List” (page EN-37).

Press the [3] (W) bm number key to display

“Root”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

root note.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To select the

temperament of keyboard play” (page EN-38).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “FineTune”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “C Tune”.

You can fine tune the pitch of each individual

note in the scale.

(1) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display the

name of the note (C to B) whose pitch you want to

fine tune.

(2) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to fine-tune the

pitch of the currently displayed note.

• You can change pitch within a range of –99 to +99

cents.

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) as many times as

necessary to fine tune the pitches of the notes you

want.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To select the

temperament of keyboard play” (page EN-38).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “AcompScl”.

Use bn [–] and [+] to turn the setting on or off.

On: The scale selected by the procedure under “To

select the temperament of keyboard play” is also applied

to Auto Accompaniment.

Off: The scale of Auto Accompaniment is always equal

temperament.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

To select the temperament of keyboard play

To fine tune a scale (Scale Fine Tuning)

To change the scale setting used for Auto

Accompaniments

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 38 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-39

Your Digital Keyboard comes with 30 built-in songs.* You can

use built-in songs for listening enjoyment, or you can mute the

part of one hand of the piano part and play along for practice.

You can also connect a USB flash drive to the Digital

Keyboard and use the same operations as those for built-in

songs to play MIDI files (SMF or CMF).

*With this Digital Keyboard, the term “song” is used to refer

to a musical piece.

• The functions and operations below cannot be used while a

built-in song or a CMF format song stored on a USB flash

drive is playing.

– Mixer function (page EN-64)

– Part Mode (page EN-62) part ON/OFF switching (You

can, however, check the currently part selection status.)

Press 7SONG BANK.

This displays (song bank indicator) and enters the

Song Bank Mode.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select a song number.

• See “Numeric Input” (page EN-14) for information

about how to specify a number.

• See page A-1 for a list of songs.

• This operation automatically changes the beat setting of the

metronome (page EN-27) to the beat of the selected song.

Even if the beat of a song is outside the allowable setting

range of the metronome, it is still applied as the metronome

setting.

• This operation changes the reverb setting (page EN-22) to

match the currently selected song.

• Selecting some songs will initially cause “Lod” to be

displayed for TEMPO (see the illustration under step 3).

This indicates that data is being loaded.

Press ck PLAY/STOP.

• This starts song playback. The playback tempo,

current measure, and current beat are shown in the

upper right corner of the display.

• The operations below are supported during song

playback.

• While a song is playing back, you can play along on

the keyboard using the tone (including split and layer

tones) that was selected before song playback was

started.

To stop song playback, press ck PLAY/STOP.

• The song plays in a continuous loop (repeat on) until

you press ck PLAY/STOP. To turn off repeat, press

bp REPEAT and confirm that there is no indicator

mark next to [REPEAT].

Playing a Built-in Song or a

Song on a USB Flash Drive

(Song Bank Mode)

Selecting a Built-in Song for

Playback

To select a single built-in song for playback

Sa i n t sGo

Song number Song name

To perform this operation: Do this:

Stop a song part way

through.

Press ck PLAY/STOP.

Pause or unpause a song. Press btkPAUSE.

Change the song playback

speed.

Press the dk TEMPO [w]

or [q] button.

Jump to the beginning of the

next measure.

Press bsdFF.

Fast forward the song Hold down bsdFF.

Jump to the beginning of the

previous measure.

Press brsREW.

Fast reverse the song Hold down brsREW.

Note Value

Measure

Tempo

Beat

Indicator goes out when repeat is turned off.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 39 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Playing a Built-in Song or a Song on a USB Flash Drive (Song Bank Mode)

EN-40

In the Song Bank mode, press 5TONE.

This displays (tone indicator). (song bank

indicator) will also remain on the display.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the tone you

want to assign to keyboard play.

• While is displayed, you can perform the split and/or

layer tone selection operation. For more information,

see “Selecting a Tone” (page EN-18).

• To change a tone number you selected using the procedure

above, press 7SONG BANK. This causes to

disappear, leaving only displayed.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Song Volume (Song Vol) (page EN-115).

To loop a range of measures in a song, you need to specify

the start measure and end measure of the section you want to

repeat.

If there is no indicator mark next to [REPEAT],

press bp REPEAT to display it.

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To select a

single built-in song for playback” (page EN-39)

to start song playback.

When playback reaches the beginning of the

section you want to loop, press bq A-B.

This will make the beginning of the measure that is

playing when you press bq A-B the beginning of the

loop, and cause the indicator mark next to [A-B] to start

to flash.

When playback reaches the end of the section

you want to repeat, press bq A-B again.

This will make the end of the measure that is playing

when you press bq A-B the end of the loop, and cause

the indicator mark next to [A-B] to stop flashing.

To return to normal playback, press bq A-B.

This causes the indicator mark next to [A-B] to disappear.

You can mute one of the hand parts of a song for playback.

Then you can practice by playing the muted part on the

keyboard. The following types of songs can be used for such

practice: built-in songs,* or CMF format (one type of CASIO

MIDI file) songs* stored on a USB flash drive.

*These songs have part channel information (page EN-41).

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select a song number.

Press ck PLAY/STOP to start song playback.

To select a tone for keyboard play in the

Song Bank mode

To adjust the balance between song and

keyboard volume

Looping Playback of Specific

Song Measures (A-B Repeat)

To loop a specific phrase

Start End

These measures are repeated.

Playing Back with One Hand’s

Part Muted

To play back with one hand’s part muted

Flashing

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 40 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-41

Playing a Built-in Song or a Song on a USB Flash Drive (Song Bank Mode)

Use bo PART SELECT to select a part to

practice.

• Each press of bo PART SELECT causes the

indicators below to appear or disappear in accordance

with the type of song that is selected.

YSong with One Left-hand and One Right-hand Part

YSong with Chord Accompaniment on the Left-hand

Side and Melody on the Right-hand Side

*Each press of bo PART SELECT cycles through these

settings, with the current setting appearing momentarily on

the display.

To stop song playback, press ck PLAY/STOP.

■Part Channel Information

In built-in songs and CMF format songs, parts where left-hand

play is recorded and parts where right-hand play is recorded

are separate. These songs have “part channel information”,

which is information that controls to which Digital Keyboard

parts left-hand and right-hand play should be assigned.

The part channel information contained in built-in songs and

general CMF format songs is described below.

Though standard MIDI files (SMF format) stored on a USB

flash drive can also be played back by the Digital Keyboard,

such files do not have part channel information. Use the

procedure below to specify whether the right-hand part or left-

hand part should be muted when bo PART SELECT is

pressed for playback of such a file.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and change

the part channel settings: Other (Other) 3 Right Hand

(Melody) Part Channel (PartR Ch), Left Hand Part Channel

(PartL Ch) (page EN-117).

• The above setting is applied only for playback of a song

that does not have part channel information. When a song

has part channel information, this setting is ignored and the

part channel information is given priority.

Both-hand playback

(Off)*

Right hand muted

(Right)*

Left hand muted

(Left)*

Both hands muted

(Both)*

Both-hand playback

(Off)*

Right hand muted

(Right)*

Left hand muted

(Left)*

Both hands muted

(Both)*

Song Type Left Hand

Part:

Right-hand

Part

Normal piano song with

one tone for both hands

Part 3 of

SONG SOLO

Part Group

Part 4 of

SONG SOLO

Part Group

Song with Auto

Accompaniment for the

left-hand part and melody

for the right-hand part

Part 1 through

8 of RHYTHM

Part Group

Part 4 of

SONG SOLO

Part Group

To specify a part channel

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 41 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-42

You can use the same operations as those for built-in songs

to play back MIDI files* stored in the MUSICDAT folder on a

USB flash drive. For information about the procedure for

saving a MIDI file to a USB flash drive, see “Using a Computer

to Copy General Song Data to a USB Flash Drive” (page

EN-123).

*Standard MIDI files (SMF format 0/1) and CASIO MIDI files

(CMF format)

Insert the USB flash drive into the Digital

Keyboard’s USB flash drive port.

• When you perform a USB flash drive operation or turn

on the Digital Keyboard while a USB flash drive is

plugged in, the Digital Keyboard initially needs to

perform a “mounting” sequence to prepare for data

exchange with the USB flash drive. Digital Keyboard

operations may be momentarily disabled while a

mounting sequence is being performed. The [USB]

indicator will flash on the display while the USB flash

drive is being mounted. It may take up to 10 or 20

seconds or even longer for a USB flash drive to be

mounted. The message “Listing” will be displayed

while the mounting operation is in progress. Do not

attempt to perform any operation on the Digital

Keyboard while a mounting sequence is in progress. A

USB flash drive needs to be mounted each time it is

connected to the Digital Keyboard.

Perform the procedure under “To select a

single built-in song for playback” (page EN-39).

• Song numbers are assigned automatically in

sequence to MIDI files on the USB flash drive. The

files are sorted on their file names, and the first MIDI

file is assigned song number 41.

You can use your Digital Keyboard to play back audio files

(WAV format, 44.1 kHz 16bit) stored in the MUSICDAT folder

on a USB flash drive. For information about the procedure for

saving an audio file to a USB flash drive, see “Using a

Computer to Copy General Song Data to a USB Flash Drive”

(page EN-123).

• While audio file playback is in progress, you can perform

normal keyboard play, and you can use layer, split

operations.

• For information about handling USB flash drives, see “USB

Flash Drive” (page EN-119).

Plug a USB flash drive where a supported

audio file is stored into the Digital Keyboard’s

USB port.

Long-press 7SONG BANK (AUDIO) until the

[AUDIO] indicator appears.

This means that the Digital Keyboard is in the Audio Mode

and is standing by for audio file playback.

• Song numbers are assigned automatically in

sequence to audio files on the USB flash drive.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the audio file

you want to play back.

To start playback, press 8AUDIO PLAY/

STOP.

This displays [AUDIO PLAY] indicator.

• The operations below are supported during playback.

Playing Back a Song from a USB

Flash Drive

To play back a song from a USB flash drive

Playing Back an Audio File

on a USB Flash Drive (Audio

Mode)

To play back an audio file

To perform this operation: Press this button:

Skip to the next file bn [+]

Skip to the previous file bn [–]

Displayed

Abso l u t e

Song number File name

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 42 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-43

To stop playback, press 8AUDIO PLAY/

STOP.

This causes the [AUDIO PLAY] indicator to disappear.

To exit the Audio Mode, press 7SONG BANK

(AUDIO).

This causes the [AUDIO] indicator to disappear.

• Playback of an audio file continues even if you exit the

Audio Mode. In this case as well, press 8AUDIO PLAY/

STOP to stop playback.

• You can loop playback of an audio file. Perform the

procedure under “To configure function settings with the

bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and turn on the

repeat setting: Audio Playback (AudioPly) 3 Audio

playback looping (Repeat) (page EN-116).

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and change

the volume setting: Audio Playback (AudioPly) 3 Audio

playback volume (Volume) (page EN-116).

Enabling Vocal Cut mutes or minimizes the vocal part in the

audio file playback. Note that this function cancels the sound

in the center position of the audio, which may (depending on

how the original audio was mixed) end up canceling

something else other than the vocal part. How vocal cut is

performed depends on the sound being input.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and change

the Center Cancel setting: Audio Playback (AudioPly) 3

Audio playback Center Cancel (C Cancel) (page EN-116).

With Auto Accompaniment, simply select the accompaniment

rhythm you want and the matching accompaniment (bass,

guitar, and other instruments) will sound automatically when

you play a chord with your left hand. It’s like having your own

personal backup group along with you wherever you go.

You can edit built-in rhythms and produce original Auto

Accompaniments (user rhythms) and save them in memory.

For details, see “Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User

Rhythm)” (page EN-76).

Press 6RHYTHM.

This displays (rhythm indicator) and enters the

Rhythm Mode.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select a rhythm number.

• See “Numeric Input” (page EN-14) for information

about how to specify a number.

• Rhythms are divided into multiple categories, and are

arranged for quick and easy navigation between

categories. For more information, see

“4CATEGORY Button” (page EN-15).

• For details about rhythm categories and types, refer to

the separate “Appendix”.

• This operation automatically changes the beat setting of the

metronome (page EN-27) to the beat of the selected

rhythm. Even if the beat of a rhythm is outside the allowable

setting range of the metronome, it is still applied as the

metronome setting.

Press ck START/STOP to start play of the

selected rhythm.

• This starts Auto Accompaniment with rhythm (drum

and percussion) only. To stop rhythm play, press

ck START/STOP again.

To adjust the balance between audio file

playback and keyboard volume

Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)

Using Auto Accompaniment

(Rhythm Mode)

Selecting a Rhythm

To select a rhythm

Strt 8Bt

Rhythm number Rhythm name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 43 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

EN-44

• You can use the eq RHYTHM Category buttons to quickly

and easily navigate between categories.

Rhythm categories are divided between two groups: Group

A (L) and Group B (M). Which category (group) a

eq RHYTHM Category button selects depends on whether

or not the indicator lamp to the left of ep RHYTHM

GROUP SELECT is lit.

Press the ep RHYTHM GROUP SELECT

button to toggle between category Group A

(indicator lamp unlit) and Group B (indicator

lamp lit).

To select a category, press its eq RHYTHM

Category button.

• This causes (rhythm indicator) to flash on the

display.

• Pressing a eq RHYTHM Category button will select

the last selected rhythm in the corresponding category.

While is flashing, you can select one of the

rhythms included in the category. To exit category

rhythm selection, press 6RHYTHM. This causes

to stop flashing.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the rhythm you

want to sound.

Use the procedure under “Selecting a Rhythm”

(page EN-43) to select the rhythm you want to

sound.

Press cm ACCOMP and confirm that the

[ACCOMP] indicator is displayed.

• For details about this indicator, see “Auto

Accompaniment Parts and the ACCOMP Indicator”

(page EN-45).

Press bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START.

• This enters synchro start standby (page EN-48).

Play the chord you want on the

accompaniment keyboard.

Auto Accompaniment will start playing when you play the

chord.

Example: Play a C chord (C-E-G).

CT-X5000: To use the RHYTHM Category

buttons to select a category

ep RHYTHM GROUP SELECT button

eq RHYTHM Category buttons

Using Auto Accompaniment

To play an Auto Accompaniment

Displayed

Flashing

Accompaniment keyboard

UPPER part keyboard

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 44 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-45

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

Use the dk TEMPO [w] and [q] buttons to

change the tempo setting.

• You can also configure the tempo setting before

starting Auto Accompaniment.

• For information about the tempo setting, see

“Changing Auto Accompaniment Speed (Tempo)”

(page EN-46).

Play other chords with your left hand as you

play the melody with your right hand.

• You can use “CASIO CHORD” or other simplified

chord fingering modes to play chords. See “To select a

chord fingering mode” (page EN-50).

• You can change the accompaniment using buttons

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to bs VARIATION/

FILL-IN 4. See “Creating a Song with an Auto

Accompaniment (Accompaniment Pattern)” (page

EN-47).

To stop Auto Accompaniment, press

ck START/STOP.

• Pressing bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START instead of

ck START/STOP will play an ending pattern before

stopping the Auto Accompaniment. See “Creating a

Song with an Auto Accompaniment (Accompaniment

Pattern)” (page EN-47).

• With the above procedure, you finger chords to be played

by the Auto Accompaniment. You also can use music

presets to sound Auto Accompaniment using a chord

progression based on the music genre you want to perform,

without inputting chords. For details, see “Using Music

Presets” (page EN-53).

■Auto Accompaniment Parts and the ACCOMP

Indicator

The Digital Keyboard’s Auto Accompaniment sounds up to

eight parts (Drums, Percussion, Bass, Chords 1 to 5)

simultaneously. The [ACCOMP] indicator indicates whether

only percussion parts (Drums, Percussion) will sound, or all

accompaniment parts will sound. Each press of

cm ACCOMP toggles the [ACCOMP] indicator between

displayed and not displayed.

• When the [ACCOMP] indicator is not displayed, only the

rhythm (drum and percussion) of the accompaniment

pattern sounds.

• When the [ACCOMP] indicator is displayed, bass, chords,

and other parts sound in accordance with the chord played

on the accompaniment keyboard.

• You can use the procedure under “Muting Specific Parts

(Part Mode)” (page EN-62) to quickly and easily mute or

unmute multiple parts.

• You can also make fine-adjustments to the volume, effect

level, and other settings for each part. For details, see

“Using the Mixer” (page EN-64).

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Auto Accompaniment volume

(AcompVol) (page EN-115).

Measure

Tempo

Beat

To adjust the balance between Auto

Accompaniment and keyboard volume

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 45 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

EN-46

There are two ways to change the tempo.

• Specifying a beats-per-minute value

• Tapping a beat with the dl TAP TEMPO button (tap input)

The current tempo value setting is always displayed in the

upper right corner of the display.

The tempo value is always shown in combination with a note

value. The example above indicates 120 quarter note beats

per minute.

Change the note value as required.

• See “To change the displayed note value” below.

Use the dk TEMPO [w] and [q] buttons to

change the tempo setting.

• The allowable tempo value setting range depends on

the currently displayed note value as shown in the

table below.

• When the note value is a quarter note, the tempo value

corresponds to the actual number of beats per minute.

When the note value is an eighth note the number of

beats per minute is twice that of the tempo value.

When the note value is a half note, the number of

beats is half that of the tempo value.

Long-press dl TAP TEMPO until the

displayed note value changes.

• Each long-press of dl TAP TEMPO cycles through

the note value settings in the sequence shown below.

Tap dl TAP TEMPO multiple times at as

steady a beat as possible.

This will set a tempo that is as close as possible to the

timing of the beat you tap.

• It helps to use this method to specify the approximate

tempo in combination with a procedure like the one

under “To specify a tempo value” (page EN-46).

• A tempo value that is input using this method has no

relation to the currently displayed note value. Depending on

the rhythm selected with the above operation, a quarter

note or eighth note tempo value is input.

You can configure settings to automatically start rhythm play

when you specify a tempo using the procedure under “To set

the tempo by tapping a beat” above.

To do so, perform the procedure under “To configure function

settings with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and

enable the following setting: Other (Other) 3 Tap rhythm

start (Tap Rhy) (page EN-117).

Changing Auto Accompaniment

Speed (Tempo)

Note Value Indicator and Tempo Value

To specify a tempo value

Note Value Tempo Value Range

Quarter note (2) 20 to 255

Eighth note (6) 40 to 510

Half note (1) 10 to 128

Dotted quarter note (2.) 13 to 170

Note value Tempo value

Current setting value

To change the displayed note value

Quarter note (2) Eighth note (6)

Dotted quarter note (2.) Half note (1)

To set the tempo by tapping a beat

To start rhythm play with the dl TAP

TEMPO button

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 46 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-47

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

Generally, the progress of a musical piece starts with an intro,

transitions to verses that are interspersed with interludes and

other changes, and then returns to the main theme before

reaching an ending. The Digital Keyboard’s Auto

Accompaniment function provides a selection of

accompaniment patterns that are suited to the progress of a

musical composition.

This section describes the different types of accompaniment

patterns of the Auto Accompaniment function.

■Variations (Four Types)

This is an accompaniment pattern that can be used in the

verse or chorus of a piece. A variation repeats anywhere from

one measure to multiple measures.

To play a variation

Press one of the VARIATION/FILL-IN buttons (bp to bs).

This sounds the variation accompaniment pattern assigned to

the button that is pressed.

• Pressing ck START/STOP sounds the Variation 1

pattern.

■Fill-Ins (Four Types)

These accompaniment patterns are used to insert short one-

or two-measure fill-ins into a piece. When a fill-in button is

pressed, the fill-in will start immediately, or on the first beat

after one measure or two measures, and then return to the

original variation accompaniment pattern.

To play a fill-in

While Variation 1 is sounding, press bp VARIATION/FILL-

IN 1. If a different variation (2, 3, 4) is sounding, press the

button (bq, br, bs) that corresponds to it.

■Intro (One Type)

This is an accompaniment pattern that can be used at the

beginning of a piece. After a multiple-measure intro

accompaniment pattern sounds, accompaniment transition to

Variation 1.

To play an intro

Press bo INTRO.

To change the variation played following the intro

While an intro is sounding, press the button for the variation

you want to sound (bq VARIATION/FILL-IN 2,

br VARIATION/FILL-IN 3, bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4)

after the intro is complete.

■Ending (One Type)

This is an accompaniment pattern that can be used at the end

of a piece. After a multiple-measure ending sounds, Auto

Accompaniment ends.

To play an ending

While an Auto Accompaniment is sounding, press

bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START.

Creating a Song with an Auto

Accompaniment (Accompaniment

Pattern)

Accompaniment Patterns

Indicator displayed while Variation 2 is sounding

Indicator displayed while Fill-In 1 is sounding

Indicator displayed while Intro is sounding

Indicator displayed while Ending is sounding

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 47 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

EN-48

You can configure settings so Auto Accompaniment starts as

soon as you play a chord on the accompaniment keyboard

(synchro start) and stops as soon as you release all of the

keys on the accompaniment keyboard (synchro stop).

Press bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START.

This enters synchro start standby, and causes the

[SYNC START] indicator and indicator to flash.

• If you want to start with an intro, press bo INTRO

here. This causes the indicator to flash.

• If you want to start with a particular variation, press the

button for the variation you want to start with

(bq VARIATION/FILL-IN 2, br VARIATION/FILL-

IN 3, bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4). The indicator

and a number indicator (1 to 4) that corresponds to the

button you press flash on the display.

Play the chord you want on the

accompaniment keyboard.

This starts Auto Accompaniment.

• To exit synchro start standby, press bt ENDING/

SYNCHRO START.

Press cl SYNCHRO STOP.

This enters synchro stop standby.

While Auto Accompaniment is sounding,

release all of the accompaniment keyboard

keys at the point where you want it to stop.

This stops Auto Accompaniment.

• The Digital Keyboard automatically enters synchro

start standby at this time.

• To exit synchro stop standby, press cl SYNCHRO STOP.

You can select from among the following six chord input

modes.

• CASIO CHORD

•FINGERED1

•FINGERED2

• FINGERED ON BASS

• FINGERED ASSIST

• FULL RANGE CHORD

For details, see “To select a chord fingering mode” (page

EN-50).

Starting and Stopping Auto

Accompaniment with the

Accompaniment Keyboard

(Synchro Start, Synchro Stop)

To use Synchro Start to start Auto

Accompaniment play

Flashing

To use Synchro Stop to stop Auto

Accompaniment play

Changing Accompaniment

Keyboard Settings

Selecting a Chord Input Mode

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 48 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-49

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

■CASIO CHORD

With CASIO CHORD, you can use simplified fingerings to

play the four types of chords described below.

• When playing a minor, seventh, or minor seventh chord, it

makes no different whether the additional keys you press

are black or white.

■FINGERED

With these input modes, you play chords on the

accompaniment keyboard using their normal chord fingerings.

Some chord forms are abbreviated, and can be fingered with

one or two keys.

See page A-2 for information about chords that are supported

and how they are fingered on the keyboard.

●FINGERED 1

Play the component notes of the chord on the keyboard.

●FINGERED 2

Unlike FINGERED 1, 6th input is not possible. m7 or m7b5 is

input.

●FINGERED ON BASS

Unlike FINGERED 1, allows input of fraction chords with the

lowest keyboard note as the bass note.

●FINGERED ASSIST

Produces an effect that is different from FINGERED 1 when

two or three keys are pressed. Pressing a root key and any

white key to the left of the root key plays a seventh chord,

while a black key plays a minor chord. Pressing both a white

and black key together plays a minor seventh chord.

In addition to FINGERED 1, you can also use the methods

below to play the three types of chords described below.

■FULL RANGE CHORD

With this mode, you can use the full area of the keyboard to

play chords and the melody.

See page A-2 for information about chords that are supported.

Chord Type

Major Chords

Pressing a single accompaniment area key in the CASIO

CHORD mode will play the major chord whose name is

marked above the key. All of the accompaniment area keys

that are marked with the same chord name play exactly the

same chord.

Example: C (C Major)

Minor Chords

To play a minor chord, press the accompaniment area key

that corresponds to the major chord, while also pressing one

other accompaniment area key to the right.

Example: Cm (C Minor)

Seventh Chords

To play a seventh chord, press the accompaniment area key

that corresponds to the major chord, while also pressing two

other accompaniment area keys to the right.

Example: C7 (C Seventh)

Minor Seventh Chords

To play a minor seventh chord, press the accompaniment

area key that corresponds to the major chord, while also

pressing three other accompaniment area keys to the right.

Example: Cm7 (C Minor Seventh)

CCDE F F

E

GAB

BCCDE F



CCDE F F

E

GAB

BCCDE F



CCDE F F

E

GAB

BCCDE F



CCDE F F

E

GAB

BCCDE F



Chord Type

Minor Chords

To play a minor chord, press the accompaniment keyboard

key that specifies the major chord, while also adding the

closest black key to the left of the major chord key.

Example: Cm (C Minor)

Seventh Chords

To play a seventh chord, press the accompaniment

keyboard key that specifies the major chord, while also

adding the closest white key to the left of the major chord

key.

Example: C7 (C Seventh)

Minor Seventh Chords

To play a minor seventh chord, press the accompaniment

keyboard key that specifies the major chord, while also

adding the closest white and black keys to the left of the

major chord key.

Example: Cm7 (C Minor Seventh)

CCDE F F



CCDE F



CCDE F F



CCDE F



CCDE F F



CCDE F



CTX5000_3000_EN.book 49 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

EN-50

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “ChordMod”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• The table below shows the relationship between

setting values and chord fingering modes.

• The accompaniment keyboard ranges for each chord

fingering mode is shown in the illustration below. The

split point (page EN-20) shown in the illustration is the

initial default split point.

YFULL RANGE CHORD

YNot FULL RANGE CHORD

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Specifying a split point (page EN-20) puts the LOWER part

keyboard and the accompaniment keyboard in the same area.

You can also specify different areas for each of these two

keyboards. You can also configure a setting so the LOWER

part tone does not sound in the area where the LOWER part

keyboard and accompaniment keyboard overlap. For details,

see the “Advanced Split Settings” (page EN-50).

Your Digital Keyboard can be split into three areas: an

UPPER part keyboard, a LOWER part keyboard, and an

accompaniment keyboard.

You can specify a split point (page EN-20) as shown in the

illustration below.

You can specify a lower point and a chord point, to assign

different areas as a LOWER part keyboard and an

accompaniment keyboard.

●Lower Point

Specifying the lower limit of the UPPER part keyboard results

in a configuration like the one shown below. The

accompaniment keyboard range is not affected in this case.

To select a chord fingering mode

Setting

value Chord Fingering Modes Display

1 CASIO CHORD CASIO Cd

2 FINGERED 1 Fingerd1

3 FINGERED 2 Fingerd2

4 FINGERED ON BASS FgOnBass

5 FINGERED ASSIST FgAssist

6 FULL RANGE CHORD FulRange

Accompaniment keyboard

UPPER part keyboard

Split Point

Accompaniment

keyboard

Accompaniment Keyboard Range Setting

Advanced Split Settings

UPPER part keyboard

Split Point

LOWER part keyboard

UPPER part keyboard

Lower Point

LOWER part keyboard

Accompaniment

keyboard

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 50 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-51

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

●Chord Point

The illustration below shows a keyboard with a chord point

specified. The LOWER part keyboard range is not affected in

this case.

• While the Chord Input Priority Mode (page EN-52) is turned

on, the LOWER part tone does not sound in the area where

the LOWER part keyboard and accompaniment keyboard

overlap.

Hold down dp SPLIT until “Split Pt” is

displayed.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Lower Pt”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

note name of the lower point note (the lower

limit of the UPPER part keyboard).

• You can also specify the lower point by holding down

dp SPLIT and pressing the keyboard key where you

want the lower point to be.

• You cannot specify a lower point that is lower than (to

the left of) the chord point. If you do, the chord point

will be forced to be the same key as the lower point.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Hold down dp SPLIT until “Split Pt” is

displayed.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Chord Pt”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

note name of the chord point (page EN-51).

• You can also specify the chord point by holding down

dp SPLIT and pressing the keyboard key where you

want the chord point to be.

• You cannot specify a chord point that is higher than (to

the right of) the chord point. If you do, the lower point

will be forced to be the same key as the chord point.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

To specify the lower point

UPPER part keyboard

Chord Point

LOWER part keyboard

Accompaniment

keyboard

B3 I C4

Lower point note number Lower point note name

To specify the chord point

B3 I C4

Chord point note number Chord point note name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 51 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Auto Accompaniment (Rhythm Mode)

EN-52

Hold down dp SPLIT until “Split Pt” is

displayed.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “CdPrior”.

Use bn [–] and [+] to switch the Chord Input

Priority Mode between on and off.

• While Chord Input Priority Mode is turned on, the

LOWER part tone does not sound in the area where

the LOWER part keyboard and accompaniment

keyboard overlap.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

One-Touch Preset gives you one-touch access to tone and

tempo settings that go well with the currently selected Auto

Accompaniment rhythm pattern.

Hold down 6RHYTHM until the tone name is

displayed.

This automatically applies the One-Touch Preset settings

in accordance with the rhythm pattern that is currently

selected.

Play a chord on the keyboard.

This immediately starts Auto Accompaniment.

Auto Harmonize lets you add harmony to melody notes you

play with your right hand for more melodic depth. You can

select any one of 12 Auto Harmonize types.

• A single button is used to control auto harmonize and the

arpeggiator (page EN-27). Because of this, the arpeggiator

cannot be used while auto harmonize is in use.

Press do AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR and confirm that the [AUTO

HARMONIZE] indicator is displayed.

• Fingering a chord on the accompaniment keyboard as

you play the melody on the UPPER part keyboard will

add chords to your melody play.

To turn Auto Harmonize off, press do AUTO

HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR.

This causes the [AUTO HARMONIZE] indicator to

disappear.

• If the [ARPEGGIATOR] indicator is displayed instead of

the [AUTO HARMONIZE] indicator in step 1 of the

above procedure, you will need to change the function

assigned to the button.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function

settings with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112)

and select “1 A.Har.” for the following setting: Auto

Harmonize/Arpeggiator (AHar/Arp) 3 AUTO

HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR button assignment

(BtnAsign) (page EN-114).

Perform the procedure under “To turn on Auto

Harmonize” and confirm that the [AUTO

HARMONIZE] indicator is displayed.

Long-press do AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR until the [FUNCTION] indicator

flashes on the display.

This displays the currently selected auto harmonize

number and name.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

auto harmonize type.

• For details about types, see “Auto Harmonize Type

List” (page EN-53).

To turn the Chord Input Priority Mode on or

off

Using Recommended Tones and

Tempos (One-Touch Presets)

Adding Harmony to Melody Notes

(Auto Harmonize)

To turn on Auto Harmonize

To select the Auto Harmonize type

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 52 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-53

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

■Auto Harmonize Type List

Music Presets are a collection of setups with chord

progression data. With the touch of a button you can recall

one of 310 presets that include tone, rhythm, and other setting

data, along with Auto Accompaniment chord progressions, all

of which are combined to match specific musical genres and

melodies.

For details about music preset categories and types, refer to

the separate “Appendix”.

Press 6RHYTHM.

Long-press cm ACCOMP until the [ACCOMP]

indicator starts to flash.

• The flashing [ACCOMP] indicator indicates that the

Digital Keyboard is in the Music Preset Mode.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select a music preset number.

This changes the displayed music preset name. At the

same time, settings are recalled for the tone, rhythm,

chord progression, and data that matches the genre or

melody indicated by the name.

• See “Numeric Input” (page EN-14) for information

about how to specify a number.

• Music presets are divided into nine categories. You

can easily find the music preset you want by going to

the dance category, classic category, etc. For more

information, see “4CATEGORY Button” (page

EN-15).

Press ck START/STOP or bo INTRO.

This starts Auto Accompaniment play in accordance with

the preset chord progression.

Play along on the keyboard with the Auto

Accompaniment.

To stop Auto Accompaniment, press

ck START/STOP or bt ENDING/SYNCHRO

START.

To exit the Music Preset Mode, press

cm ACCOMP.

• At this time the tone and rhythm settings configured by

the Music Preset Mode remain in effect.

Type

number Type Name Description

01 Duet 1 Adds close (separated by 2 to 4

degrees) 1-note harmony below

the melody note.

02 Duet 2 Adds open (separated by more

than 4 to 6 degrees) 1-note

harmony below the melody note.

03 Country Adds country style harmony.

04 Octave Adds the note from the next lower

octave.

05 5th Adds the fifth degree note.

06 3-Way Open Adds 2-note open harmony, for a

total of three notes.

07 3-Way Close Adds 2-note close harmony, for a

total of three notes.

08 Strings Adds harmony that is optimal for

strings.

09 4-Way Open Adds 3-note open harmony, for a

total of four notes.

10 4-Way Close Adds 3-note close harmony, for a

total of four notes.

11 Block Adds block chord notes.

12 Big Band Adds big band style harmony.

Using Music Presets

To perform using a music preset

So f t Po

Music preset number

Music preset name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 53 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-54

• With some music presets, selecting a number in step 3

causes the [SYNC START] indicator to start to flash,

indicating that the Digital Keyboard is in synchro start

standby (page EN-48). If this happens, Auto

Accompaniment can be started by playing something on

the keyboard instead of pressing ck START/STOP. For

information about operations that can be performed while in

synchro start standby, see step 1 under “To use Synchro

Start to start Auto Accompaniment play” (page EN-48).

• The accompaniment pattern operations (page EN-47) can

be used during a performance with a music preset.

• The operations below cannot be used during play that

employs a music preset.

– Rhythm setting change (page EN-43)

– Synchro stop (page EN-48)

– One-Touch Preset (page EN-52)

– Registration (page EN-67)

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Other (Other) 3 Music preset key

change (MP Key) (page EN-117).

Each selection of a music preset automatically changes the

Digital Keyboard settings below. Changed settings are

maintained even after the Music Preset Mode is exited.

•Tempo

• Layer (on/off)

• Split (on/off)

•do AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR button

assignment

• Auto Harmonize (on/off, type)

• Arpeggiator (on/off, type)

• Arpeggiator Hold (on/off)

• Tone number (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2

parts)

• Octave Shift (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2

parts)

• Reverb, Chorus, Delay (on/off, type)

Short phrases can be recorded and assigned to each of the

four phrase pads. Pressing a pad will loop playback its

recorded phrase. You can sound phrases individually, or you

can sound multiple phrases at the same time.

The explanations in this section refer to phrases assigned to

the phrase pads as Phrase 1 through Phrase 4.

■Phrase Sets and Phrase Storage Locations

A group of four phrases assigned to the four phrase pads are

called a “phrase set”. There are 25 phrase sets numbered 1

through 25, which means that up to 100 phrases (25 phrase

sets with 4 phrases each) can be stored as user phrases.

When you record a phrase, you specify a storage location

using a phrase set number (1 to 25) and a phrase number 1 to

You can use the procedure below to change the phrase set

currently assigned to the phrase pads to another set.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Phr Pad”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phr Set”. You can select a phrase set

number at this time.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select a

phrase set number.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

To change the key of a chord progression

Settings Changed by Music Preset

Using Phrase Pads

Changing to Another Phrase Set

To change the phrase set

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 54 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-55

Using Phrase Pads

Before playing back a phrase, you must first change to the

phrase set where the phrase is located if it is not already

assigned to the phrase pads. For details, see “Changing to

Another Phrase Set” (page EN-54).

Press one of the phrase pads. For example,

press cq PHRASE PAD [P1].

This starts playback of Phrase 1 and displays the [P1]

indicator.

Press a different phrase pad. For example,

press cq PHRASE PAD [P3].

This starts playback of Phrase 3, and plays Phrase 1 and

Phrase 3 at the same time. In addition to the [P1]

indicator, the [P3] indicator also appears.

To stop playback of only one of the phrases,

hold down cr STOP and press the

cq PHRASE PAD where the phrase you want

to stop is assigned.

For example, holding down cr STOP and pressing

cq PHRASE PAD [P1] will stop playback of Phrase 1

and allow Phrase 3 to continue sounding. The [P1]

indicator disappears at this time.

To stop phrase playback while a single phrase

is playing, press cr STOP.

• You can also stop phrase playback by performing the

same operation as that in step 3.

• Pressing the pad of a phrase that is playing back will restart

the phrase from the beginning.

To stop phrase playback while a multiple

phrases are playing, press cr STOP.

• The procedure below starts phrase playback and, at the

same time, starts Auto Accompaniment in accordance with

the operation (pressing ck START/STOP or bo INTRO,

etc.) performed in step 2.

While holding down bt ENDING/SYNCHRO

START, press the phrase pad (for example,

cq PHRASE PAD [P1]) whose phrase you want

to start playing along with Auto

Accompaniment.

• If you want playback of multiple phrases to start

simultaneously, repeat the above operation for the

other phrases as well.

• To cancel phrase and Auto Accompaniment

simultaneous start standby, hold down bt ENDING/

SYNCHRO START as you press the phrase pad you

want to cancel.

Press ck START/STOP to start Auto

Accompaniment.

This simultaneously starts Auto Accompaniment and

phrase playback.

Starting and Stopping Phrase

Playback

To start and stop phrase playback

Displayed

Not displayed

To stop playback of all phrases

To synchronize phrase playback with Auto

Accompaniment

Flashing

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 55 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Phrase Pads

EN-56

Phrase playback setups control how the phrase assigned to a

phrase pad (1 to 4) plays when you press the pad. The setups

you configure here are recorded to the corresponding pad.

Specify the phrase pad whose playback setup

you want to configure.

(1) Press bk FUNCTION and confirm that the

[FUNCTION] indicator is displayed.

(2) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Phr Pad”, and then press [6] (ENTER). This

displays “Phr Set”.

(3) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to specify the

phrase pad (Pad 1 to Pad 4) whose playback setup

you want to configure, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to select the

item whose setting you want to change.

• For information about setting items, see “Phrase

Playback Setup Items” below.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting.

• Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each of the items whose

setting you want to configure.

When the setup is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Configuring Phrase Playback

Setups

To configure a phrase playback setup

Phrase Playback Setup Items

Setup Item

(Display) Description Settings

Looped playback

(Loop)

Specifies whether or not to

perform loop playback.

Off: Plays the phrase all the

way through and then stops.

On: Loops the phrase.

On, Off

Key shift

(KeyShift)

Changes the playback pitch

in semitone units. A lower

setting value lowers the

playback pitch, while a

higher setting value raises

the pitch.

–24 to 24

Timing Sync

(TimingSy)

Specifies whether playback

timing and speed when a

phrase pad is pressed

should be synced with a

previously playing Auto

Accompaniment, phrase, or

song recorded with the MIDI

recorder.

Off: No syncing.

Beat: Forces correction of

deviation in beat units.

Measure: Forces correction

of deviation in measure

units.

Off, Beat,

Measure

Chord Sync

(ChordSyn)

Enabling this function

automatically adjusts the

pitch of the phrase in

accordance with the chords

of an Auto Accompaniment

that is playing.

Important!

Note that Chord Sync can be

applied to a phrase recorded

in C Major only. Play and

record the phrase in C Major

and assign it to the

applicable pad. Next, turn on

Chord Sync for the pad.

On, Off

Break Point

(Break Pt)

This setting is applied while

Chord Sync is turned on. It

specifies a note key, from C

to B, as the point at which

the phrase notes drop one

octave.

C to B

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 56 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-57

Using Phrase Pads

A phrase is created by recording notes played manually on

the keyboard. Up to 16 measures can be specified for the

length of the phrase to be recorded, and up to approximately

1,000 notes can be recorded. As with playback, recording

also loops back to the first measure when the end of the

number of measures specified for the phrase is reached. You

can add notes while listening to playback of previously

recorded content.

• The [RECORD] indicator will start to flash during recording

when the number of remaining note count is 100 or lower.

When there are no more remaining notes, recording stops

automatically and the [RECORD] indicator disappears.

Select the tone you want to use for phrase

recording.

• See “Selecting a Tone” (page EN-18).

• You cannot use layer or split when recording a phrase.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Phr Pad”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phr Set”.

Use the bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select

the phrase set number you want to use for

phrase recording.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This enters record standby and causes the [RECORD]

indicator to flash. Also, the [P1] indicator will be flashing.

• The indicators ([P2] through [P4]) of the phrase pads

that have phrases recorded will appear on the display.

• The [P1] indicator flashes even if there is already a

phrase recorded to the P1 phrase pad. You can

determine whether or not there is a phrase recorded to

the P1 phrase pad by pressing any cq PHRASE PAD

button other than [P1] in step 6. If the [P1] indicator is

displayed, it means there is a phrase recorded. If the

indicator is not displayed, it means nothing is recorded

to the P1 phrase pad.

• If you want to change mixer settings, perform the

procedure under “To configure mixer settings” (page

EN-64). To configure mixer settings of the phrase to be

recorded, configure the mixer settings of the

corresponding part (Part 6 through Part 9) of the

KEYBOARD part group. For example, when recording

to Phrase Pad 1, configure the mixer settings of Part 6

(Phrase Pad 1) of the KEYBOARD part group.

Press a cq PHRASE PAD button ([P1] to [P4])

to specify the phrase number of the recording

destination.

• This causes the indicator of the pad you press (P1 to

P4) to flash on the display.

To start recording, press ck PLAY/STOP or

play something on the keyboard.

Playing on the keyboard automatically starts recording.

This displays the [RECORD] indicator.

• The number of measures and beats are counted up in

the upper right corner of the display. When the final

beat of the length (number of measures)* specified for

the phrase being edited is reached, the count restarts

from 001:01.

*For information about the number of measure setting,

see “Configuring Phrase Recording Settings” below.

Timing in accordance with the MEASURE and

BEAT values on the display, play something on

the keyboard when required.

• What you record will play back when the display

returns to the measure and beat where it was

recorded. You can overdub the recording as many

times as you like while listening to the playback.

• Playback while recording is in progress is sound

produced by the KEYBOARD part group’s Part 6

(Phrase Pad 1) to Part 9 (Phrase Pad 4). If you want to

the change the mixer settings for playback during

phrase recording, select the part of pad currently being

recorded as the target for the operation under “To

configure mixer settings” (page EN-64).

When you are finished recording, press

8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

Recording a Phrase

To record a phrase

Flashing Flashing

Measure Beat

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 57 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Phrase Pads

EN-58

If you change phrase recording settings, those settings will be

in effect for the subsequent recording operation as well.

Change the recording settings as required when recording a

new phrase.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Phr Pad”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phr Set”.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to flash.

Long-press 8RECORD/STOP until “Length”

is displayed.

• This enters the phrase recording setting mode.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to select the

item whose setting you want to change.

• For information about setting items, see “Phrase

Recording Setting Items” (page EN-58).

When all the settings are the way you want,

press 8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

You can use the procedures in this section to copy and delete

phrase sets.

Perform the procedure 1 through 3 under “To

change the phrase set” (page EN-54) to select

the number of the phrase set you want to copy.

Long-press 8RECORD/STOP until “Copy” is

displayed.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Phr Set” and stands by for selection of the

copy destination.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

copy destination phrase set number.

• Be sure to specify an empty area as the copy

destination.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is displayed. “Complete” appears

after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

Configuring Phrase Recording

Settings

To configure phrase recording settings

Phrase Recording Setting Items

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Number of

measures

(Length)

Specifies the length (number of

measures) of the phrase to be

recorded.

1 to 16

Quantize

(Quantize)

Specify either recording of notes

in the timing they are played on

the keyboard or automatic

alignment of notes based on a

note value. Selecting a setting

other than “Off” displays a note

value (4: quarter note, d: dotted

note, t: triplets).

Off, 4, 8,

16, 32,

4d, 8d,

16d, 32d,

4t, 8t, 16t,

32t

Metronome

(Metronom)

Specifies whether or not the

metronome should sound during

recording.

On, Off

Pre-count

(Precount)

Specifies whether or not to

sound a pre-count when

recording.

On, Off

Managing Phrase Sets

To copy a phrase set

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 58 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-59

Using Phrase Pads

Perform the procedure 1 through 3 under “To

change the phrase set” (page EN-54) to select

the number of the phrase set you want to

delete.

Long-press 8RECORD/STOP until “Copy” is

displayed.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Clear”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to delete or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel the delete operation.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is displayed. “Complete” is

displayed after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

You can use the procedures in this section to edit individual

phrases. You can delete or copy a phrase, and configure

quantize, key shift, and mixer settings.

• Quantize automatically corrects the timing of recorded

notes to match a note value being used as the quantize

reference.

• Key shift offsets the pitch of recorded sounds in semitone

steps.

To edit a phrase, enter the phrase editing mode.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Phr Pad”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phr Set”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

number of the phrase set that includes the

phrase you want to edit.

Long-press bk FUNCTION until the [EDIT]

indicator appears.

• This enters the phrase editing mode. “Clear” will

appear at this time.

Use the procedure under “To enter the Phrase

Editing mode” (page EN-59) to enter the Phrase

Editing mode.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Phrase” and causes the [P1] indicator to

flash on the display.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

number of the phrase you want to delete, and

then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is on the display. “Complete” is

displayed after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

To delete a phrase set Editing a Phrase

To enter the Phrase Editing mode

To delete a phrase

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 59 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using Phrase Pads

EN-60

Use the procedure under “To enter the Phrase

Editing mode” (page EN-59) to enter the Phrase

Editing mode.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Copy”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Src Set”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

number of the phrase set that contains copy

source phrase, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Src Phr” and causes the [P1] indicator to

appear.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

copy source phrase number, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Dst Phr” and causes the [P1] indicator to

flash on the display.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

copy destination phrase number, and then

press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is displayed. “Complete” is

displayed after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

Use the procedure under “To enter the Phrase

Editing mode” (page EN-59) to enter the Phrase

Editing mode.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Other Clr”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phrase” and causes the [P1] indicator to

flash on the display.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

phrase whose data (except for note events)

you want to delete, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is displayed. “Complete” is

displayed after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

To copy a phrase To delete all data from a phrase except note

events

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 60 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-61

Using Phrase Pads

Use the procedure under “To enter the Phrase

Editing mode” (page EN-59) to enter the Phrase

Editing mode.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Quantize”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phrase” and causes the [P1] indicator to

flash on the display.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

number of the phrase you want to quantize,

and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Value”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

note value to be used as the quantize reference

note.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is displayed. “Complete” is

displayed after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

Use the procedure under “To enter the Phrase

Editing mode” (page EN-59) to enter the Phrase

Editing mode.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “KeyShift”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Phrase” and causes the [P1] indicator to

flash on the display.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

number of the phrase you want to key shift,

and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Value”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

key shift setting value.

• You can specify a value in the range of –24 to 24.

Lowering the setting value by one lowers the pitch by

one semitone, while raising the value raises the pitch.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is displayed. “Complete” is

displayed after the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

To quantize a phrase

Display Description

4, 8, 16, 32 Quarter note, eighth note, sixteenth note,

thirty-second note

4d, 8d, 16d, 32d Dotted notes

4t, 8t, 16t, 32t Triplet notes

To key shift a phrase

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 61 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-62

Use the procedure under “To enter the Phrase

Editing mode” (page EN-59) to enter the Phrase

Editing mode.

Long-press 9PART (MIXER) until the

[MIXER] indicator appears.

This displays the [KEYBOARD] indicator and mixer

part indicator.

• Mixer part indicators through correspond to

phrase numbers 1 through 4.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to select the phrase whose mixer settings you

want to configure.

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the menu item you want to change.

• Initial default setting values are indicated by an

asterisk (*).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

Your Digital Keyboard produces Auto Accompaniment and

keyboard play notes using multiple parts. You can use the

part on/off function to easily mute and unmute one or more

parts. For example, you can mute all parts except for the

drum, percussion, and bass parts of the Auto

Accompaniment.

The example below shows how to turn each Auto

Accompaniment part on or off. If you perform this operation

while an Auto Accompaniment is sounding, you can compare

what the accompaniment sounds like with and without the

part.

Press 9PART.

This causes the indicator lamp to the left of the button to

light (Part Mode).

This displays the name of the currently selected part

group.

• For details about part groups, see “Part On/Off

Function Part Groups” (page EN-63).

To configure phrase mixer settings

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Tone (Tone) Changes the phrase

tone.

0 to 900

Volume

(Volume)

Adjusts the phrase

volume level.

0 to 100* to 127

Pan (Pan) Adjusts the stereo

position of the phrase. 0

indicates the center,

while a smaller value

shifts to the left and a

larger value shifts to the

right.

–64 to 0* to 63

Reverb Send

(Rev Send)

Specifies how much

reverb is applied to the

selected part.

0 to 40* to 127

Chorus Send

(Cho Send)

Specifies how much

chorus is applied to the

selected part.

0* to 127

Delay Send

(Dly Send)

Specifies how much

delay is applied to the

selected part.

0* to 127

Muting Specific Parts (Part

Mode)

Turning a Part On or Off

To turn each part on or off

Lit

boa rd

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 62 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-63

Muting Specific Parts (Part Mode)

Use bn [–] and [+] to select the part group of

the part you want to turn on or off.

• For example, display the [RHYTHM] indicator. While

the [RHYTHM] indicator is displayed, you can turn

each Auto Accompaniment part on or off. The mixer

part indicator numbers that correspond to the currently

sounding Auto Accompaniment will be shown on the

display.

• For information about the mixer part indicator numbers

and their parts, see “List of Parts for Each Mixer Part

Group” (page EN-65).

To turn a part on or off, press the bm number

key that corresponds to the part number.

• For example, each press of the [2] bm number key

toggles the drum part between off ( indicator not

displayed) and on ( indicator displayed).

• The SONG SOLO and MIDI IN part groups have 16

parts, and only eight parts (1 to 8, or 9 to 16) are

displayed at a time. While parts 9 through 16 are

displayed, first subtract 8 from the part number. Next,

press the bm number key that corresponds to the

result. For part , for example, press the [8] bm

number key.

To exit the Part mode, press 9PART.

• Part on/off settings are maintained even if you exit the

Part Mode.

Besides the Auto Accompaniment in the explanation above,

the Digital Keyboard also uses other parts in order to generate

sounds for manual keyboard play, song playback, and MIDI

message input from external devices. The part on/off function

divides these parts into multiple part groups.

■Part Group and Indicator List

*1 Since SONG SOLO and MIDI IN use the same sound

source parts, parameters of the same part numbers are

shared.

*2 is displayed on the right end of the mixer part

indicators. Mixer part indicator is displayed while

microphone input is turned on.

• For information about the parts in each part group and their

corresponding mixer part indicator numbers, see “List of

Parts for Each Mixer Part Group” (page EN-65).

Mixer Part Indicators

(Turned on parts displayed.)

[RHYTHM] indicator displayed

Part On/Off Function Part Groups

Part Group Name

(Indicator) Description

Keyboard play

(KEYBOARD)

Hand play, Phrase Pads 1 to 4,

and Auto Harmonize parts

Auto Accompaniment

(RHYTHM)

Auto Accompaniment parts

Song System

(SONG SYSTEM)

MIDI recorder system track

parts (Part configuration same

as KEYBOARD.)

Song Solo

(SONG SOLO)*1

Song bank song and MIDI

recorder solo track parts

MIDI Input (MIDI IN)*1 MIDI IN parts

Microphone input (E*2) Microphone input part

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 63 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-64

Your Digital Keyboard produces Auto Accompaniment and

keyboard play notes using multiple parts. You can use the

mixer function to make fine-adjustments to the volume, effect

level, and other settings for each of these parts.

• You can quickly and easily mute and unmute parts. For

details, see “Muting Specific Parts (Part Mode)” (page

EN-62).

Long press 9PART (MIXER) until the [MIXER]

indicator appears.

This causes the mixer info display area to change as

shown in the example below.

• The [MIXER] indicator on the display indicates that the

Digital Keyboard is in the Mixer Mode.

• The displayed part group indicator ([KEYBOARD] in

this example) indicates the KEYBOARD part group

(hand-played performance part) currently being

affected by mixer operations. The flashing mixer part

indicator ( in this example) indicates the part

(UPPER 1 part in the case of the KEYBOARD part

group) whose setting is currently being configured. For

details about part groups and parts, see “List of Parts

for Each Mixer Part Group” (page EN-65).

Select the part group whose mixer settings you

want to configure.

(1) Press 9PART and confirm that the indicator lamp

to the left of the button is lit.

(2) Use bn [–] and [+] to select the part group whose

settings you want to configure.

*1 is displayed on the right end of the mixer part

indicators. Mixer part indicator is also displayed

at this time.

(3) After selecting a part group, press 9PART and

confirm that the indicator lamp to the left of the button

is unlit.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to select the part whose settings you want to

configure with the mixer.

• Pressing [3] (W) while the rightmost part is selected

or [1] (V) while the leftmost part is selected will scroll

to another part group.*2

*2 Pressing [3] (W) while Part 8 of the SONG SOLO or

MIDI IN part group is selected changes to display of

parts 9 to 16 of the same part group. Pressing [1]

(V) while Part 9 is selected changes to display of

parts 1 to 8.

• You can use the bm number keys to quickly select

parts. See “To select parts with the bm number keys”

(page EN-65).

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

select the item whose setting you want to

configure.

This displays a level indicator of each part setting value

for the currently selected setting item.

• For details about setting items, see the “Advanced

Mixer Settings” (page EN-66).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

Using the Mixer

Mixer Operation

To configure mixer settings

Level indicator

Part group indicator (displayed)

Mixer info display area

Mixer part indicator

[MIXER] indicator (displayed)

To select this part group: Displays this indicator:

KEYBOARD Part Group KEYBOARD

RHYTHM Part Group RHYTHM

SONG SYSTEM Part Group SONG and SYSTEM

SONG SOLO Part Group SONG and SOLO

MIDI IN Part Group MIDI IN

External Part Group

(Microphone Input)

E*1

Vo l u

Current setting value Setting item name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 64 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-65

Using the Mixer

To exit the Mixer mode, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

• The displayed, flashing, and not displayed status of mixer

part indicators depends on the part on/off status in the Part

Mode. For details, see “Muting Specific Parts (Part Mode)”

(page EN-62).

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To configure

mixer settings” (page EN-64) to select the part

group whose mixer settings you want to

configure.

Press 9PART.

This causes the indicator lamp to the left of the button to

light (Part Mode in the Mixer Mode).

To select a part, press the bm number key that

corresponds to the part number.

• For part , for example, press the [2] bm number

key.

• The SONG SOLO and MIDI IN part groups have 16

parts, and only eight parts (1 to 8, or 9 to 16) are

displayed at a time. While parts 9 through 16 are

displayed, first subtract 8 from the part number. Next,

press the bm number key that corresponds to the

result. For part , for example, press the [8] bm

number key.

To exit the Part mode, press 9PART.

This causes the indicator lamp to the left of the button to

go out.

The tables below show Mixer Mode part groups and the parts

included in each group.

●KEYBOARD Part Group

This is the hand-played performance part, and it includes Auto

Harmonize and phrase pads.

●RHYTHM Part Group

Auto Accompaniment parts.

To select parts with the bm number keys

List of Parts for Each Mixer Part

Group

Part Number Corresponding Part

1 UPPER 1

2 UPPER 2

3LOWER1

4LOWER2

5 Auto Harmonize

6 Phrase Pad 1

7 Phrase Pad 2

8 Phrase Pad 3

9 Phrase Pad 4

Part Number Corresponding Part

1 Percussion

2Drums

3Bass

4 Chord 1

5 Chord 2

6 Chord 3

7 Chord 4

8 Chord 5

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 65 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the Mixer

EN-66

●SONG SYSTEM Part Group

These are the parts of the system track in songs recorded

with the MIDI recorder.

●SONG SOLO Part Group

These are the parts of song bank songs and the solo track in

songs recorded with the MIDI recorder.

●MIDI IN Part Group

MIDI receive parts.

●External Part Group

Microphone input.

Initial default setting values are indicated by an asterisk (*).

*1 The level indicators of all the parts for which this setting is

turned on are displayed, while all the parts for which it is

turned off are not displayed.

*2 While this setting item is displayed, you can sound only the

selected part, if you want. See “To sound only a selected

part” (page EN-67).

*3 The pan setting status is indicated by the level indicators

as shown below. The indicator on the far left is included to

show all of the segments only.

Part Number Corresponding Part

1 UPPER 1

2 UPPER 2

3LOWER1

4LOWER2

5 Auto Harmonize

6 Phrase Pad 1

7 Phrase Pad 2

8 Phrase Pad 3

9 Phrase Pad 4

Part Number Corresponding Part

1 to 8 Song Part 1 to Part 8

9 to 16 Song Part 9 to Part 16

Part Number Corresponding Part

1 to 8 MIDI Receive Part 1 to Part 8

9 to 16 MIDI Receive Part 9 to Part 16

Part Number Corresponding Part

1 Microphone input

Advanced Mixer Settings

Setting Items for Each Part Group

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Part on/off

(Part)*1 *2

Specifies on/off for the

selected part.

On*, Off

Volume

(Volume)

Adjusts the volume level

of the selected part.

0 to 100* to 127

Pan (Pan)*3Specifies the stereo pan

position of each part. 0

indicates the center,

while a smaller value

shifts to the left and a

larger value shifts to the

right.

–64 to 0* to 63

Reverb Send

(Rev Send)

Specifies how much

reverb is applied to the

selected part.

0 to 40* to 127

Chorus Send

(Cho Send)

Specifies how much

chorus is applied to the

selected part.

0* to 127

Delay Send

(Dly Send)

Specifies how much

delay is applied to the

selected part.

0* to 127

(All Segments) Negative Value 0 Positive Value

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 66 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-67

Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To configure

mixer settings” (page EN-64).

To sound only the part whose setting is being

configured, press the [6] (ENTER) bm number

key.

This causes the mixer part indicator of the part whose

setting is being configured, the level indicator above it,

and marks to the left and right of the level indicators to

flash.

• This enables sounding of the part whose setting is

being configured, and disables sounding of all other

parts.

To re-enable the other parts, press [6] (ENTER)

again.

• Using the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

change to another part will re-enable the other parts.

You can use the registration function to register the setup of

the Digital Keyboard (tone, rhythm, and other settings). You

can recall a registered setup as required to perform a

particular song, etc.

• Registration can be used in the Rhythm Mode (page

EN-43).

• The registration function cannot be used while in the Song

Bank Mode (page EN-39), during demo play (page EN-17),

or while configuring function settings (page EN-112).

■Setup Storage Locations

Setup registrations are stored in memory locations that are

divided into 16 banks. Each bank has eight storage areas,

which means you can register up to 128 (16 banks × 8 areas)

setups.

• Use the co BANK button to specify a bank.

• Specify an area using the cs REGISTRATION buttons ([1]

to [8]).

To sound only a selected part

Flashing

Registering and Restoring a

Setup (Registration)

Area 1 …Area 8

Bank 1 Setup 1-1 …Setup 1-8

Bank 2 Setup 2-1 …Setup 2-8

Bank 16 Setup 16-1 …Setup 16-8

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 67 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Registering and Restoring a Setup (Registration)

EN-68

Setting items that can be registered are shown below.

●Keyboard Play

• Tone number (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2

parts)

• Layer (on/off)

• Split (on/off)

• Reverb, Chorus, Delay (on/off, type)

●Note Control

• Transpose

• Octave Shift (UPPER 1, LOWER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER 2

parts)

• Touch Response setting status

• Pedal 1 and Pedal 2 effects (Pedal 2 type is not recorded)

• Scale, scale fine tune, part fine tune, part coarse tune

•dn SUSTAIN button (on/off, setting mode)

•dm PORTAMENTO button (on/off, setting mode)

• CT-X5000: dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE button (on/

off, setting mode)

●Split Settings

•Split Point

• Lower Point

• Chord Point

• Chord Input Priority Mode

●Auto Accompaniment

• Rhythm Number

• ACCOMP on/off ([ACCOMP] indicator displayed/not

displayed status)

• Tempo, Note value display setting

• Chord Fingering Mode

• Synchro start

• Auto Accompaniment volume

●AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR

•do AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR button

assignment

• Auto Harmonize (on/off, type)

• Arpeggiator (on/off, type)

• Arpeggiator Hold (on/off)

●Phrase Pad

• Phrase set number

• Phrase playback setups

●Mixer

• Part on/off setting

• Volume, Pan, Reverb send, Chorus send, Delay send

settings

• Specifying a bank and area that already has data stored

to it in the procedure below causes the recorded data

to be deleted. For information about banks and areas,

see “Setup Storage Locations” (page EN-67).

Set up the Digital Keyboard with the tone,

rhythm and other settings to suit the song you

will play.

Select the bank where you want to store the

registration.

(1) Press co BANK.

• “Bank” will appear on the display along with the

currently selected bank number.

(2) While “Bank” and the bank number are displayed,

use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select a bank

number.

• While “Bank” and the bank number are displayed,

each press of co BANK cycles through the bank

numbers.

While holding down cp STORE, press one of

the cs REGISTRATION buttons ([1] to [8]) to

select the area you want to specify as the

registration destination.

Pressing the two buttons registers the current Digital

Keyboard setup to the bank and area you specified in

steps 2 and 3.

Registering a Setup

Registration Setting Items

To register a setup

Bank number

Bank number Area number

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 68 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-69

Registering and Restoring a Setup (Registration)

As required, press cn FREEZE to toggle the

freeze function between on and off.

• The indicator lamp is lit when the function is on, and

unlit when it is off.

• For details about the freeze function, see “Freeze

Function” below.

Use co BANK to select the bank that contains

the setup you want to recall.

Press one of the cs REGISTRATION buttons

([1] to [8]) to select the area whose setup you

want to recall.

This causes the Digital Keyboard’s settings to change in

accordance with the setup you recalled.

Recalling a registered setup normally overwrites all of the

settings shown under “Registration Setting Items” (page

EN-68).

You can also use the freeze function to specify particular

settings that should not be overwritten when a setup

registration is recalled.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and enable or

disable the items on each sub-menu that appears when you

perform the following operation: Registration Memory (Reg

Mem) 3 Registration Memory Freeze Target (RMFrzTgt)

(page EN-116).

Setting items that can be specified are shown below.

• Under initial default settings, Rhythm and Tempo are on

while all other settings are off.

Recalling a Registered Setup

To recall a setup

Bank number

Bank number Area number

Freeze Function

Display Setting that is not changed when a

setup is recalled

Rhythm Rhythm Number, ACCOMP on/off,

Synchro start/stop status

Tempo Tempo

Tone Tone number, Layer (on/off), Split (on/off),

Octave Shift, KEYBOARD part group mixer

settings

Split Pt Split Point, Lower Point, Chord Point,

Chord Input Priority Mode

AHar/Arp Auto Harmonize/Arpeggiator

Trans. Transpose

Scale Scales

Touch Touch Response

Effect Effect type (Reverb, Chorus, Delay on/off)

PartTune Coarse Tune, Fine Tune

Phr Pad Phrase Pad

Cntrller Setting items included under Controller

(Cntrller) in the “Function Setting Item List”

(page EN-113).

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 69 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Registering and Restoring a Setup (Registration)

EN-70

Each press of the pedal cycles through the currently selected

bank’s registrations (setups) in area number sequence.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Reg Mem” (Registration Memory),

and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Reg Seq” (Registration sequence).

Use bn [–] and [+] to select the pedal jack that

will be used for the registration sequence

operation.

• This displays the [SEQ] indicator, which indicates that

the registration sequence function is enabled.

• The purpose of the pedal connected to the jack

selected here is registration setup recall only. Normal

pedal functions (functions assigned to the pedal with

the “Using a Pedal” operation, page EN-29) cannot be

used.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

Connect a sustain pedal (see “Separately

Available Accessories”, page EN-3) to the jack

you selected in step 4.

At the point when you want to recall the

registration setup, press the pedal.

• Each press of the pedal cycles through the currently

selected bank’s registration setups in sequence from

Area 1.

• Pressing the pedal while the Area 8 setup is recalled

cycles back to the Area 1 setup.

After you are finished recalling the registration

setups using the pedal, perform steps 1

through 5 to turn off the registration sequence

function.

This causes the [SEQ] indicator to disappear.

Using a Pedal to Cycle Through

Multiple Setups (Registration

Sequence)

To play with a Registration Sequence

To select this pedal jack: Display this:

fo PEDAL1 jack Pedal1

fp PEDAL2/EXPRESSION jack Pedal2

(Turn off registration function) Off

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 70 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-71

You can edit a built-in tone to create a user tone, and save up

to 100 user tones for later recall.

■Saving to an External Device

User tones can be saved to a USB flash drive or a computer.

For details, see “To save Digital Keyboard data to a USB flash

drive” (page EN-121) and “Transferring Data Between the

Digital Keyboard and a Computer” (page EN-125).

Select the tone you want to edit.

• Be sure to select the UPPER 1 part tone (page

EN-19). The UPPER 1 part tone will be the tone being

edited.

• You cannot select a drum set tone for editing.

Long-press bk FUNCTION until the [EDIT]

indicator appears.

• This enters the Tone Editing Mode and displays the

tone editing screen.

• For details about editable parameters, see the “Tone

Editing Item List” (page EN-74).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display the editing item you want to modify.

• If the [ENTER] indicator is displayed, press [6]

(ENTER) to enter the sub-menu and then use the [1]

(V) and [3] (W) keys to display the editing item you

want to modify.

• To return to a main menu from a sub-menu, press the

[4] (EXIT) bm number key.

• Using the “DSP Edit” editing item, you can configure

precise DSP effects for a tone using a wide variety of

parameters. For details about the configuration of

Digital Keyboard DSP effects and an overview of DSP

editing, see “DSP Editing” (page EN-72). For details

about the DSP editing operation, see “To use DSP

editing to edit an effect” (page EN-72).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 above for each of the

editing items you want to change.

• You can sound the tone you are editing by playing

something on the keyboard. This means you can

immediately check to see how your edits are affecting

the tone.

To save the edited tone, press the [7] (WRITE)

bm number key.

• If the tone you are editing is a user tone, the message

“Replace?” will appear here. Press bn [+] (YES) to

replace the original tone data with the new data, or bn

[–] (NO) to save the new data without replacing the

original data.

• If there are already 100 user tones stored in memory,

the error message “Data Full” will appear when you

press bn [–] (NO) to indicate that you cannot save the

new tone.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the tone save operation is being performed. Do not

perform any operation while this message is on the

display. “Complete” appears on the display after the

operation is complete.

To exit the Tone Editing Mode, long-press the

[4] (EXIT) bm number key.

• If you did not perform any editing after executing the

operation in step 6, the Tone Editing Mode will be

exited and the [EDIT] indicator will disappear from the

display.

• If you performed any editing after executing the

operation in step 6, the message “Exit?” will be

displayed here. Perform one of the operations below.

Editing a Tone (User Tones)

Creating a User Tone

To edit a tone

Displayed

Atk.Ti

Current setting value Editing item name

To do this: Perform this operation:

Continue editing

without exiting the

Tone Editing Mode

Press bn [–] (NO).

Save edited data and

exit the Tone Editing

Mode

(1) Press bn [+] (YES).

(2) When “Write?” appears on the

display, press bn [+] (YES)

again.

Discard edited data

and exit the Tone

Editing Mode

(1) Press bn [+] (YES).

(2) When “Write?” appears on the

display, press bn [–] (NO).

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 71 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Editing a Tone (User Tones)

EN-72

• If you are saving the data as a new user tone, the save

destination tone number will be the lowest one in memory

that currently does not have any data stored. The newly

saved user tone will be selected after this operation is

complete.

• If there is no data stored for a user tone number, “No Data”

will be displayed for the tone name. If there is data stored,

“No Name” will be displayed. For information about

renaming, see “To rename a user tone” (page EN-73).

A DSP (Digital Signal Processor) is a type of effect that is

connected between the sound source and output. DSP types

are equalizer, tremolo, limiter, wah, etc. Many of the built-in

tones of your Digital Keyboard are preset with DSPs that are

suited for each tone. Such tones are called “DSP tones”.

The tone editing function of the Digital Keyboard includes a

DSP Edit setting item for editing DSPs. The Digital Keyboard

DSPs that can be edited using DSP Edit are configured as

shown below.

• A DSP consists of one or more DSP modules (“Module” in

the above illustration).

• Your Digital Keyboard comes with hundreds of preset

DSPs. For DSP editing, you can start with a preset DSP

that is one assigned to a built-in tone, or a DSP that is

provided especially for DSP editing.

• The number of DSP modules and the type of each module

(equalizer, limiter, wah, etc.) are different for each DSP.

To perform DSP editing, you first select a preset DSP and

then edit its parameters in accordance with the DSP

module(s).

For details about the DSP modules and the parameters of

each DSP module, see “DSP Effect List” (page EN-132).

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To edit a tone”

(page EN-71).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “DSP Edit”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “On/Off”.

If the setting is turned off, press bn [–] or [+] to

turn it on.

Press [3] (W) to display “DSP Num”.

To select the DSP to be edited, use bn [–] and

[+] or the bl dial to specify the DSP number (1

to 900), and then press [6] (ENTER).

• See the “DSP number” item in the “Tone Editing Item

List” (page EN-74).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to select the DSP module whose parameters

you want to change.

• What appears here is the DSP module name. For

details about DSP modules, see “DSP Module List”

(page EN-132).

• If the DSP you selected in step 5 has one DSP

module, the display will not change if you press [1]

(V) or [3] (W). Check the DSP module name and

then proceed to step 7.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Bypass”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display the parameter whose setting you

want to change.

• For details about parameters whose settings can be

configured for each DSP module, see “DSP Parameter

List” (page EN-133).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

10.

Repeat steps 8 and 9 as required to configure

settings of other parameters.

11.

Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

12.

Repeat steps 6 through 11 as required to

configure settings of DSP modules.

DSP Editing

Sound Source Output

DSP

No Na

Tone number Tone name

Module

Bypass

To use DSP editing to edit an effect

ono 3EQ

Module number DSP module name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 72 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-73

Editing a Tone (User Tones)

13.

Perform step 6 and 7 under “To edit a tone”

(page EN-71).

Select the user tone you want to rename.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until

“ToneName” appears.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays the renaming screen.

Input the new name.

• See “Text Character Input” (page EN-15) for

information about how to enter text.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the rename

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Select the user tone you want to copy.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until

“ToneName” appears.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “ToneCopy”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

copy destination tone number and then press

[6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

• If there is already a user tone stored at the tone

number you specified as the copy destination, the

message “Replace?” will appear.

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the copy

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the copy operation is being performed. Do not perform

any operation while this message is on the display.

“Complete” appears on the display after the operation

is complete.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Select the user tone you want to delete.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until

“ToneName” appears.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “ToneClr”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to delete or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel the delete operation.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

To rename a user tone

To copy a user tone

To delete a user tone

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 73 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-74

Editing a Tone (User Tones)

Tone Editing Item List

Item Name Display Description Settings

Attack Time Atk.Time Adjusts the time after a key is pressed from when the note

starts to sound until it reaches maximum volume. A larger

value specifies a slower attack.

0 to 127

Release Time Rel.Time Adjusts how long notes linger after keyboard keys are

released. A larger values specifies a longer release.

0 to 127

Cutoff Frequency Cutoff F Adjusts timbre by attenuating the components of a note’s

frequency characteristics that are higher than a certain

frequency (cutoff frequency). A larger value specifies a

brighter, harder sound, while a lower value specifies a

mellower, softer sound.

0 to 127

Resonance Resonance Adjusts the gain of harmonic tones in the vicinity of the cutoff

frequency specified above. A larger value creates a more

unusual sound.

0 to 127

Vibrato Vibrato Sub-menu of vibrato setting items.

Vibrato Type Vib.Type Selects the vibrato waveform. Sin, Tri, Saw,

Sqr

Vibrato Depth VibDepth Specifies the depth of vibrato. 0 to 127

Vibrato Rate Vib.Rate Adjusts the speed of vibrato. 0 to 127

Vibrato Delay VibDelay Adjusts the time until vibrato starts after a note is sounded. 0 to 127

Octave Shift OctShift Shifts the pitch upwards or downwards in octave steps. –3 to 0 to 3

Volume Volume Specifies the volume level of a tone. A larger value sets a

higher volume level.

0 to 127

Key pressed Key released

Note ends

Time

A : Attack time

R : Release time

Volume

Setting Description Waveform

Sin Sine wave

Tri Triangle wave

Saw Sawtooth wave

Sqr Square wave

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 74 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-75

Editing a Tone (User Tones)

*1 Shows the name (Compressor, Limiter, Enhancer, etc.) of the DSP module. For details about DSP modules, see “DSP Module

List” (page EN-132).

*2 The number of parameters that can be configured and their details depend on the DSP module. For details, see “DSP

Parameter List” (page EN-133).

*3 Not displayed when the DSP selected for editing has only one DSP module. When there are multiple DSP modules included in

a DSP, a sub-menu will appears for each of them.

Velocity Sense Vel.Sens Specifies how much the tone and/or volume should be

affected by keyboard touch (pressure). A larger positive value

specifies more brightness and greater volume as keyboard

touch becomes stronger. A larger negative value specifies

more softness and less volume as keyboard touch becomes

stronger. A value of 0 specifies no change in accordance with

keyboard touch.

–64 to 0 to 63

Reverb Send Rev.Send Specifies how much reverb is applied to a tone. 0 to 127

Chorus Send Cho.Send Specifies how much chorus is applied to a tone. 0 to 127

Delay Send Dly.Send Specifies how much delay is applied to a tone. 0 to 127

DSP Edit DSP Edit Sub-menu of DSP effect setting items.

On, Off On/Off On: DSP effect applied to the tone.

Off: DSP effect not applied to the tone.

On, Off

DSP number DSP Num Selects a preset DSP when applying a DSP effect.

• Built-in tone numbers 1 through 800 include tones with

DSP (DSP tones). Only a DSP tone can be specified here,

and other (non-DSP) tones cannot be specified.

• Numbers 801 through 900 are for DSP editing only. For

details, refer to the “DSP List” in the separate “Appendix”.

1 to 900

DSP Module 1 *1Sub-menu for configuring setting of DSP modules included in the selected

DSP.

Bypass Bypass On: Bypass this DSP module.

Off: Enable this DSP module.

On, Off

(Depends on the DSP module.*2)

DSP Module 2 and

beyond *3

*1Sub-menu for configuring setting of DSP modules included in the selected

DSP.

(Same as the Module 1 parameters.)

Item Name Display Description Settings

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 75 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-76

You can create accompaniment patterns that sound while

using the Digital Keyboard’s Auto Accompaniment function

and store them as user rhythms.

The storage locations and the number of rhythms that can be

stored depend on the Digital Keyboard model.

CT-X5000: Rhythm numbers 294 to 393 (up to 100 rhythms)

CT-X3000: Rhythm numbers 294 to 343 (up to 50 rhythms)

■Saving to an External Device

User rhythms can be saved to a USB flash drive or a

computer. For details, see “To save Digital Keyboard data to a

USB flash drive” (page EN-121) and “Transferring Data

Between the Digital Keyboard and a Computer” (page

EN-125).

The structure of each rhythm is as shown below.

Each rhythm includes 10 accompaniment patterns, and each

accompaniment pattern is made up of eight parts. To create a

single user rhythm from scratch, you need to record eight

parts of each of the 10 accompaniment patterns. You can also

use a built-in rhythm as a base, and replace parts of it with

new recordings, or you can copy and edit accompaniment

patterns, if you want.

• For details about accompaniment patterns, see

“Accompaniment Patterns” (page EN-47).

You can record keyboard play (note data) and pitch bend

wheel operations to an accompaniment pattern part.

●Creating an Accompaniment with All New Parts

You can record each part of an accompaniment pattern, if you

want.

• The “Empty” blocks in the above illustration are special

memory areas (user areas) for editing, and one is provided

for each part. After you record something to a block, it

becomes “Recorded”.

●Editing an Existing Accompaniment Pattern*1

You can use the accompaniment pattern of an existing rhythm

as a base and add new recordings of keyboard play to empty

parts. Note that this operation is possible for variations and fill-

ins only.*2

• In the above illustration, “Fixed” indicates rhythm data that

must be used as it is. It cannot be edited by you.

*1 Built-in rhythm or previously-saved user rhythm

*2 This operation is not supported for an existing intro or

ending. You can make all parts empty and create a new

pattern from scratch.

●Copying and Editing the Accompaniment Pattern of an

Existing Rhythm

You can copy the accompaniment pattern of an existing

rhythm to a user area and then edit the copied data.

• In the above illustration, “Copy” and “Edited” are both the

same status as “Recorded”.

• You can add notes and delete unwanted notes in real time

while listening to playback of the copied data.

In addition to the operations described above, you can keep

all of the accompaniment pattern parts of an existing rhythm

“Fixed”, change just the mixer settings, and save the result as

a user rhythm.

Creating an Auto

Accompaniment

(User Rhythm)

Rhythm Configurations

Data Recordable to Each Part

Rhythm

[V]: Variation, [F]: Fill-in, [ I ]: Intro, [E]: Ending

Accompaniment Pattern

[V1] to [V4]

Accompaniment Pattern

[F1] to [F4]

Percussion Percussion

Drums Drums

Bass Bass

Chords 1 to 5 Chords 1 to 5

Accompaniment Pattern

[I]

Accompaniment Pattern

[E]

Percussion Percussion

Drums Drums

Bass Bass

Chords 1 to 5 Chords 1 to 5

Creating a User Rhythm

Percussion Empty Recorded Recorded

…

Drums Empty Empty Recorded

Bass Empty Empty Empty

Chord 1 Empty Empty Empty

…

Percussion Fixed Empty Recorded

…

Drums Fixed Fixed Fixed

Bass Fixed Fixed Fixed

Chord 1 Fixed Fixed Fixed

…

Percussion Fixed Copy Edited

…

Drums Fixed Copy Copy

Bass Fixed Copy Copy

Chord 1 Fixed Copy Copy

…

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 76 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-77

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

• For information about the mixer part indicator numbers and

the part of each accompaniment pattern in the procedure

below, see “RHYTHM Part Group” under “List of Parts for

Each Mixer Part Group” (page EN-65).

• You can copy the accompaniment pattern of an existing

rhythm to a user area and then edit (add and delete) notes

recorded in each part. You can copy an entire

accompaniment pattern (step 3 below) or copy a particular

part only (step 5 below). Refer to each of these procedures

as required.

Select a user rhythm where there is no data

stored.

• See “Selecting a Rhythm” (page EN-43).

• “No Data” is displayed for the rhythm name while a

user rhythm where there is no data stored is selected.

Long-press bk FUNCTION until the [EDIT]

indicator appears.

• This enters the Rhythm Editing Mode and displays the

rhythm editing screen.

• indicators will be flashing on the display. This

indicates that Variation 1 of the accompaniment

pattern is selected for editing.

• “Drum” is displayed for the part to be edited.

Select the accompaniment pattern to be edited.

*Each press of the button toggles between Variation and Fill-

in.

• The indicator for the currently selected

accompaniment pattern (page EN-47) will flash.

• At this point, you could copy an existing

accompaniment pattern to a user area. See “To copy

an existing accompaniment pattern for editing” (page

EN-83).

Specify the number of measure and the time

signature of the accompaniment pattern you

want to create.

(1) Press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT MENU).

(2) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Element”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

(3) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Measure”, and then use bn [–] and [+], or the bl

dial to change the setting value.

(4) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display “Beat”

(time signature), and then use bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to change the setting value (Setting Ranges:

2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8).

(5) Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Creating and Editing a User

Rhythm

To create a totally new rhythm and save it

Displayed

To select this: Press this button:

Intro bo INTRO

Ending bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START

Variation 1 to 4,

Fill-in 1 to 4

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to

bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4*

Accompaniment Pattern Settings

Intro, Ending 01 to 16

Variation 01 to 16

Fill-in 01 to 02

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 77 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

EN-78

Select the part to be edited.

(1) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is lit.

(2) Use the bm number keys [1] through [8] to select the

part to be edited.

• This displays the mixer part indicator that

corresponds to the selected part to flash.

(3) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is unlit.

• At this point, you could copy a part in an existing

rhythm to a user area (except when the

accompaniment pattern is an intro or ending). See

“To copy an existing rhythm part for editing” (page

EN-84).

Configure the tone and octave shift settings of

the part, if you want.

(1) Select the tone you want to use for part recording.

See “Selecting a Tone” (page EN-18).

• Only drum set tones can be selected for Drums

and Percussion parts. Drum set sounds cannot be

selected for the bass and the Chord 1 through

Chord 5 parts.

(2) Configure the part’s octave shift setting.

While holding down dr OCTAVE, press the

ds TRANSPOSE [q] or [w] button.

(3) If there are recorded parts (the accompaniment

pattern of an existing rhythm, copied part, or part

recorded by performing the procedure up to step 10

at least once), pressing ck START/STOP here

starts looped playback of all the available recorded

parts. This means you can monitor the effects of your

settings as you configure them.

(4) If there are recorded parts, pressing the [6] (ENTER)

bm number key will play back only the notes of the

part being edited.

• This causes the mixer part indicator of the part

being edited and the level indicator above it to

flash.

• To exit the above state, press [6] (ENTER) again.

Configure playback settings of the part being

edited as desired.

• See “To configure the playback settings of a user

rhythm part” (page EN-86).

Record keyboard play for the part being edited.

• See “To record keyboard play to each part” (page

EN-81).

Configure the mixer settings of the part being

edited as desired.

• See “To configure mixer settings of a part being

edited” (page EN-83).

10.

Perform steps 5 through 9 for all parts.

11.

Perform steps 3 through 10 for all

accompaniment patterns.

12.

Save the edited rhythm using the procedure

under “To save a user rhythm” (page EN-85).

To select this part: Press this number key:

Percussion [1]

Drums [2]

Bass [3]

Chord 1 to Chord 5 [4] to [8]

Flashing

When the part being edited is a drum part

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 78 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-79

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

• When editing the accompaniment pattern of an existing

rhythm, you can perform new recording operations for each

of the following parts: Variations 1 through 4 and Fill-ins 1

through 4. In the case of intro and ending, you need to first

clear all parts and then record new parts.

• You can copy the accompaniment pattern of an existing

rhythm to a user area and then edit (add and delete) notes

recorded in each part. You can copy an entire

accompaniment pattern (step 3 below) or copy a particular

part only (step 5 below). Refer to each of these procedures

as required.

Select the built-in rhythm or previously-saved

user rhythm you want to edit.

• See “Selecting a Rhythm” (page EN-43).

Long-press bk FUNCTION until the [EDIT]

indicator appears.

• This enters the Rhythm Editing Mode and displays the

rhythm editing screen.

• This causes the indicator to flash. This

indicates that Variation 1 of the accompaniment

pattern is selected for editing.

• “Drum” is displayed for the part to be edited.

Select the accompaniment pattern to be edited.

*Each press of the button toggles between Variation and Fill-

in.

• The indicator for the currently selected

accompaniment pattern (page EN-47) will flash.

• At this point, you could copy an existing

accompaniment pattern to a user area. See “To copy

an existing accompaniment pattern for editing” (page

EN-83).

Depending on the accompaniment pattern you

selected, perform one of the operations below.

YIf you selected Variation 1 to 4 or Fill-in 1 to 4

Advance directly to step 5.

YIf you selected Intro or Ending

Clear all the parts of the accompaniment pattern.

(1) Perform steps 2 through 4 under “To batch clear the

recorded data in all parts included in a single

accompaniment pattern” (page EN-85).

(2) Press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT MENU).

(3) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Element”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

(4) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display “Measure”, and then use bn [–] and [+], or

the bl dial to change the setting value.

(5) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display “Beat”

(time signature), and then use bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to change the setting value (Setting Ranges:

2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8).

(6) Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Select the part to be edited

(1) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is lit.

(2) Use the bm number keys [1] through [8] to select the

part to be edited.

• This displays the mixer part indicator that

corresponds to the selected part to flash.

(3) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is unlit.

• At this point, you could copy a part in an existing

rhythm to a user area (except when the

accompaniment pattern is an intro or ending). See

“To copy an existing rhythm part for editing” (page

EN-84).

To edit an existing rhythm and save it

To select this: Press this button:

Intro bo INTRO

Ending bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START

Variation 1 to 4,

Fill-in 1 to 4

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to

bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4*

Displayed

Accompaniment Pattern Settings

Intro, Ending 01 to 16

Variation 01 to 16

Fill-in 01 to 02

To select this part: Press this number key:

Percussion [1]

Drums [2]

Bass [3]

Chord 1 to Chord 5 [4] to [8]

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 79 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

EN-80

Configure the tone and octave shift settings of

the part, if you want.

(1) Select the tone you want to use for part recording.

See “Selecting a Tone” (page EN-18).

• Only drum set tones can be selected for Drums

and Percussion parts. Drum set sounds cannot be

selected for the bass and the Chord 1 through

Chord 5 parts.

(2) Configure the part’s octave shift setting.

While holding down dr OCTAVE, press the

ds TRANSPOSE [q] or [w] button.

(3) Pressing ck START/STOP here starts looped

playback of all the parts of the accompaniment

pattern you are currently editing. This means you can

monitor the effects of your settings as you configure

them.

(4) If there are recorded parts, pressing the [6] (ENTER)

bm number key will play back only the notes of the

part being edited.

• This causes the mixer part indicator of the part

being edited and the level indicator above it to

flash.

• To exit the above state, press [6] (ENTER) again .

Configure playback settings of the part being

edited as desired.

• See “To configure the playback settings of a user

rhythm part” (page EN-86).

Record keyboard play for the part being edited.

• See “To record keyboard play to each part” (page

EN-81).

Configure the mixer settings of the part being

edited as desired.

• See “To configure mixer settings of a part being

edited” (page EN-83).

10.

Perform steps 5 through 9 for all parts.

11.

Perform steps 3 through 10 for all

accompaniment patterns.

12.

Save the edited rhythm using the procedure

under “To save a user rhythm” (page EN-85).

Select the built-in rhythm or previously-saved

user rhythm you want to edit.

• See “Selecting a Rhythm” (page EN-43).

Long-press bk FUNCTION until the [EDIT]

indicator appears.

Perform step 3 under “To edit an existing

rhythm and save it” (page EN-79).

Perform step 5 under “To edit an existing

rhythm and save it” (page EN-79).

Perform the procedure under “To configure

mixer settings of a part being edited” (page

EN-83).

Perform steps 4 and 5 for all parts whose mixer

settings you want to configure.

Perform steps 3 through 6 for all

accompaniment patterns whose mixer settings

you want to configure.

Save the edited rhythm using the procedure

under “To save a user rhythm” (page EN-85).

Flashing

When the part being edited is a drum part

To configure only the mixer settings of an

existing rhythm and save it

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 80 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-81

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

• The operation shown here is performed as the steps of the

procedures below.

– Step 8 under “To create a totally new rhythm and save it”

(page EN-77)

– Step 8 under “To edit an existing rhythm and save it”

(page EN-79)

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This enters recording standby and displays “Recorded”

or “Empty”.

If “Fixed” is displayed here, it means that the currently

selected part cannot be recorded. After a few seconds,

the display will return to what was shown before you

pressed 8RECORD/STOP.

• For details about these indicators, see “Part Data

Status Indicators” (page EN-82).

• To exit recording standby, press 8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

Configure recording settings as desired.

• The settings of recording items that you configured in

the past will still be in effect. Items you have not

changed will be configured with their default settings.

For details about setting items, see the “User Rhythm

Recording Settings” (page EN-82).

• To configure settings, perform the steps below.

(1) Long-press 8RECORD/STOP until “Quantize”

appears.

(2) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to

display the menu for the changes you want to make.

(3) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

(4) When settings are the way you want, press the

8RECORD/STOP again.

Practice what you will play as required.

• To sound the parts of the accompaniment pattern and

practice what you plan to play on the keyboard before

actually recording it, perform the procedure below.

(1) Long-press cm ACCOMP until the [ACCOMP]

indicator starts to flash.

This enters the Rehearsal Mode.

• The Rehearsal Mode causes the keyboard to

operate the same way as it does during recording,

without recording anything.

(2) Press ck START/STOP.

This plays back data that is already recorded to each

part of the accompaniment pattern.

• The bass part and chord parts 1 through 5 play in

the key of C Major. The key and the chord types

do not change even if you play something on the

accompaniment keyboard.

(3) Play on the keyboard in time with the playback.

Keyboard play will sound using the tone you selected

before entering recording standby.

(4) To exit the Rehearsal Mode, long-press

cm ACCOMP until the [ACCOMP] indicator

disappears from the display.

To start recording, press ck START/STOP.

• The message “Record..” also appears.

• The number of measures and beats are counted up in

the upper right corner of the display. When the final

beat of the length (number of measures) specified for

the accompaniment pattern is reached, the count

restarts from 001:01.

To record keyboard play to each part

Flashing

Displayed

Measure Beat

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 81 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

EN-82

Timing in accordance with the “MEASURE”

and “BEAT” values on the display, play

something on the keyboard when required.

•ek PITCH BEND wheel operations are also included

in the recording.

•dt MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE button operations

are also included in the recording (CT-X5000 only).

• What you record will play back when the display

returns to the measure and beat where it was

recorded.

• To delete specific recorded notes, hold down

cs REGISTRATION [2]. When playback reaches the

note you want to delete, press the keyboard key that

corresponds to the note to be deleted. Holding down

cs REGISTRATION [2] along with one or more

keyboard keys while playback is being performed will

delete all of the notes that correspond to the keyboard

keys as they played while the button and keys are held

down.

• Until you perform step 6 below, you can layer

keyboard notes and delete recorded notes as many

times as you like.

When you are finished recording, press

8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

• Pressing ck START/STOP starts looped playback of

recorded data.

• To try normal keyboard play with recorded data as

back up (with the keyboard part tone and not the

recorded part tone), long-press 5TONE. This will

display part indicator in the upper left corner of

the display. This displays the name of the tone

assigned to the keyboard and enables play of that tone

on the keyboard.

■Part Data Status Indicators

The table below explains the status indicators for parts being

edited on the rhythm editing screen.

■User Rhythm Recording Settings

Initial default setting values are indicated by an asterisk (*).

This indicator: Means this:

Fixed (Fixed Data) Data that was recalled from a built-in

rhythm or a previously stored user

rhythm, not user area data. Real-time

recording of keyboard notes is not

allowed. The only editing operation

supported is configuring mixer settings.

Recorded

(Recorded Data)

Already recorded editable user area

data. Mixer settings and real-time

recording of keyboard notes are

possible with this status.

Empty (No Data) User area where nothing is recorded.

Mixer settings and real-time recording

of keyboard notes are possible with

this status.

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Quantize

(Quantize)

Specify either recording of notes

in the timing they are played on

the keyboard or automatic

alignment of notes based on a

note value. Selecting a setting

other than “Off” displays a note

value (4: quarter note, d: dotted

note, t: triplets).

Off*, 4, 8,

16, 32, 4d,

8d, 16d,

32d, 4t, 8t,

16t, 32t

Precount

(Precount)

Specifies whether a precount

should sound before recording

starts after ck START/STOP is

pressed in recording standby.

Selecting “1” sounds a one-

measure precount, while “2”

sounds a two-measure precount.

Selecting “Off” turns off the

precount, so recording starts as

soon as ck START/STOP or a

keyboard key is pressed.

Off, 1*, 2

Play Chord

(PlayChrd)

Starting recording of an

accompaniment pattern starts

repeat playback of all the parts of

the pattern, except for the part

being recorded. During such

repeat playback, you can use

this setting to specify the chord

type to be used for playback by

bass and chord parts. Available

settings are “C” (C major), “C7”

(C 7th), and “Cm” (C minor).

Selecting “Off” turns off bass and

chord part notes.

Off, C*,

C7, Cm

Metronome

(Metronom)

Specifies whether or not the

metronome should sound during

recording.

On, Off*

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 82 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-83

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

• The operation shown here is performed as the steps of the

procedures below.

– Step 9 under “To create a totally new rhythm and save it”

(page EN-77)

– Step 9 under “To edit an existing rhythm and save it”

(page EN-79)

– Step 5 under “To configure only the mixer settings of an

existing rhythm and save it” (page EN-80)

Long-press 9PART (MIXER) until the

[MIXER] indicator appears.

This displays the Part On/Off status of the part being

edited.

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the menu item you want to change.

• Initial default setting values are indicated by an

asterisk (*).

*1 Only drum set tones can be selected for Drums and

Percussion parts. Drum set sounds cannot be selected for

the bass and the Chord 1 through Chord 5 parts.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

When mixer settings are the way you want,

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

In the Rhythm Editing Mode, select the copy

destination accompaniment pattern.

• Perform steps 1 to 3 under “To create a totally new

rhythm and save it” (page EN-77), or steps 1 to 3

under “To edit an existing rhythm and save it” (page

EN-79).

Press cs REGISTRATION [1].

This displays “Element”.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays the currently selected rhythm number and

rhythm name.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the rhythm you want to use as the

source of the accompaniment pattern copy

operation.

Select the accompaniment pattern you want to

use as the copy source.

The indicator for the currently selected accompaniment

pattern (page EN-47) will flash.

*Each press of the button toggles between Variation and Fill-

in.

• Select an intro when the copy destination is an intro, or

an ending when the copy destination is an ending.

• When the copy destination is Variation 1 to 4, select

any one of Variation 1 to 4.

• When the copy destination is Fill-in 1 to 4, select any

one of Fill-in 1 to 4.

• Pressing ck START/STOP here starts looped

playback of the accompaniment pattern you selected

as the copy source.

To execute the copy operation, press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the copy

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the copy operation is being performed. Do not perform

any operation while this message is on the display.

“Complete” appears on the display after the operation

is complete.

To configure mixer settings of a part being

edited

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Part On/Off

(Part)

Specifies on/off for the

selected part.

On*, Off

Part tone

(Tone)

Specifies the tone of the

selected part.

Volume

(Volume)

Adjusts the volume level of

the selected part.

0 to 127*

Pan (Pan) Specifies the stereo pan

position of the selected

part. 0 indicates the center,

while a smaller value shifts

to the left and a larger

value shifts to the right.

–64 to 0* to 63

Reverb Send

(Rev Send)

Specifies how much reverb

is applied to the selected

part.

0 to 40* to 127

Chorus Send

(Cho Send)

Specifies how much

chorus is applied to the

selected part.

0* to 127

Delay Send

(Dly Send)

Specifies how much delay

is applied to the selected

part.

0* to 127

To copy an existing accompaniment pattern

for editing

To select this: Press this button:

Intro bo INTRO

Ending bt ENDING/SYNCHRO START

Variation 1 to 4,

Fill-in 1 to 4

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to

bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4*

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 83 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

EN-84

• You cannot copy parts included in an intro or an

ending.

In the Rhythm Editing Mode, select the copy

destination part.

• Perform steps 1 to 5 under “To create a totally new

rhythm and save it” (page EN-77), or steps 1 to 5

under “To edit an existing rhythm and save it” (page

EN-79).

Press cs REGISTRATION [1].

This displays “Element”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Part”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays the currently selected rhythm number and

rhythm name.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the rhythm you want to use as the

source of the accompaniment pattern copy

operation.

Select the accompaniment pattern that

includes the part you want to use as the copy

source.

The indicator for the currently selected accompaniment

pattern (page EN-47) will flash.

*Each press of the button toggles between Variation and Fill-

in.

Select the part you want to use as the copy

source.

(1) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is lit.

(2) Use the bm number keys [1] through [8] to select the

part to be copied.

(3) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is unlit.

• Pressing ck START/STOP here starts looped

playback of only the part you selected as the copy

source.

To execute the copy operation, press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the copy

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the copy operation is being performed. Do not perform

any operation while this message is on the display.

“Complete” appears on the display after the operation

is complete.

To copy an existing rhythm part for editing

To select this: Press this button:

Variation 1 to 4,

Fill-in 1 to 4

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to

bs VARIATION/FILL-IN 4*

To select this part: Press this number key:

Percussion [1]

Drums [2]

Bass [3]

Chord 1 to Chord 5 [4] to [8]

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 84 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-85

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

In the Rhythm Editing Mode, select the

accompaniment pattern whose parts you want

to batch clear.

• Perform steps 1 to 3 under “To edit an existing rhythm

and save it” (page EN-79).

Press cs REGISTRATION [2].

This displays “Element”.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the clear

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• This clears all the parts in the selected

accompaniment pattern.

• You cannot clear parts of an intro or an ending.

In the Rhythm Editing Mode, select the part you

want to clear.

• Perform steps 1 to 5 under “To edit an existing rhythm

and save it” (page EN-79).

Press cs REGISTRATION [2].

This displays “Element”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Part”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the clear

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• This clears the selected part.

• The operation shown here is performed as the steps of the

procedures below.

– Step 12 under “To create a totally new rhythm and save

it” (page EN-77)

– Step 12 under “To edit an existing rhythm and save it”

(page EN-79)

– Step 8 under “To configure only the mixer settings of an

existing rhythm and save it” (page EN-80)

Press the [7] (WRITE) bm number key.

• If the rhythm you are editing is a user rhythm, the

message “Replace?” will appear here. Press bn [+]

(YES) to replace the original rhythm data with the new

rhythm data. To save the data as a new rhythm, press

bn [–] (NO).

• If there are already the maximum number of allowable

user rhythms stored in memory (CT-X5000: 100,

CT-X3000: 50), the error message “Data Full” will

appear when you press bn [–] (NO) to indicate that

you cannot save the new rhythm.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the rhythm save operation is being performed. Do not

perform any operation while this message is on the

display. “Complete” appears on the display after the

operation is complete.

To exit the Rhythm Editing Mode, long-press

the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

• If you did not perform any editing after executing the

operation in step 1, the Rhythm Editing Mode will be

exited and the [EDIT] indicator will disappear from the

display.

• If you performed any editing after executing the

operation in step 1, the message “Exit?” will be

displayed here. Perform one of the operations below.

To batch clear the recorded data in all parts

included in a single accompaniment pattern

To clear the recorded data in a particular part

included in a single accompaniment pattern

To save a user rhythm

To do this: Perform this operation:

Continue editing

without exiting the

Rhythm Editing Mode

Press bn [–] (NO).

Save edited data and

exit the Rhythm Editing

Mode

(1) Press bn [+] (YES).

(2) When “Write?” appears on the

display, press bn [+] (YES)

again.

Discard edited data

and exit the Rhythm

Editing Mode

(1) Press bn [+] (YES).

(2) When “Write?” appears on the

display, press bn [–] (NO).

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 85 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

EN-86

• If you are saving the data as a new user rhythm, the save

destination rhythm number will be the lowest one in

memory that currently does not have any data stored. The

newly saved user rhythm will be selected after this

operation is complete.

• If there is no data stored for a user rhythm number, “No

Data” will be displayed for the rhythm name. If there is data

stored, “No Name” will be displayed. For information about

renaming, see “To rename a user rhythm” (page EN-89).

• The operation shown here is performed as the steps of the

procedures below.

– Step 7 under “To create a totally new rhythm and save it”

(page EN-77)

– Step 7 under “To edit an existing rhythm and save it”

(page EN-79)

Press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT MENU).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Part”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

the menu item you want to change.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

• Menu items and setting ranges are shown below.

• For details about each item, see the “User Rhythm

Part Playback Setting Details” (page EN-87).

Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

User Rhythm Part Playback

Settings

To configure the playback settings of a user

rhythm part

Item Name (Display) Settings

Chord Conversion Table (Table) 01 to 19

Break Point (Break Pt) C to B

Invert (Invert) On, Off, 7th

Retrigger (Retrig.) On, Off

Bend Range (BndRng) 00 to 24

No Na

Rhythm number Rhythm name

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 86 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-87

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

■Chord conversion table (Table)

Recording of each accompaniment pattern is normally performed using C major (root of C, major type). When playing an Auto

Accompaniment, you can use a root other than C and a chord type other than major, if you want. This is accomplished by using a

“chord conversion table” to convert the C major recorded data to another root and/or chord type. Regardless of what root or chord

type you specify, the currently selected chord table is used to make corrections to suit the instrument parts and the type of music

being played in order to ensure musically natural accompaniment.

With this parameter, you can select from among the 19 types of chord conversion tables listed below.

*1 Accompaniment Pattern

*2 For Variation and Fill-in

*3 For Intro and Ending

User Rhythm Part Playback Setting Details

Number Table Name *1Parts Description

01 Bass Basic *2Bass Normally used for a bass part.

02 Bass f-root *2Bass Variation of number 01. Always makes the first note the root note

when changing chords.

03 Bass 7th *2Bass Used for a bass part recorded with a 7th chord.

04 Bass 7th f-root *2Bass Variation of number 03. Always makes the first note the root note

when changing chords.

05 Chord Basic *2Chord Normally used for a chord part.

06 Chord Var2 *2Chord Used for a chord part that has a tension chord.

07 Chord Var3 *2Chord When a 7th chord is specified while playing, the 5th note is

converted to a 7th note. In the case of C7, for example, G becomes

Bb.

08 Chord Var4 *2Chord Variation of number 05 (Chord Basic).

09 Chord 7th *2Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a 7th chord.

10 Chord Minor *2Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a minor chord.

11 Phrase *2Chord Used for the chord part to which a phrase (such as a major scale)

was recorded.

12 Chord Minor *2Bass Used for a bass part recorded with a minor chord.

13 Chord Minor f-root *2Bass Variation of number 12. Always makes the first note the root note

when changing chords.

14 Penta Phrase *2Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a pentatonic scale phrase.

15 Intro n-minor *3Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a natural

minor.

16 Intro m-minor *3Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a melodic

minor (ascending).

17 Intro h-minor *3Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a

harmonic minor.

18 Intro no Change *3Bass/chord Recording of original as-is, with no minor/major conversion in

accordance with chord specified while playing.

19 Intro dorian *3Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a dorian

scale.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 87 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

EN-88

■Break Point (Break Pt)

This parameter specifies the key, from C to B, that is the point

at which Auto Accompaniment bass and chord notes drop one

octave.

For example when F is specified as the break point, a C major

chord recorded as C3E3G3 (CEG) becomes D3F#3A3 (DF#A

raised one note each) when D is fingered on the chord

keyboard, E3G#3B3 (EG#B raised one note each) when E is

fingered, and F2A2C3 (FAC dropped one octave) when F is

fingered.

■Inversion (Invert)

This parameter specifies whether or not chords during Auto

Accompaniment play should mirror inverted forms of the

original chord (EGC and GCE for CEG).

For example, let’s say that the original recorded C major

chord is CEG and an F chord is fingered on the chord

keyboard. If “Off” is selected for this setting, the chord will be

directly converted to FAC. If “On” (or “7th”) is selected, the

chord will be converted to CFA, which is the inverted form that

is nearest to CEG. The transition of chord notes during

playback when “On” (or “7th”) is selected is smaller, so

accompaniment sounds more natural.

Note that you should select “7th” in place of “On” only if “C7”

was specified for the “PlayChrd” setting* when recording the

accompaniment pattern and if you selected “09 (Chord 7th)”

for the chord conversion table.

*For information about “PlayChrd”, see the “User Rhythm

Recording Settings” (page EN-82).

• When selecting “On” (or “7th”) for this setting, make sure

that you select “C” for the “Break Point” (Break Pt) setting.

■Retrigger (Retrig.)

This parameter specifies how accompaniment pattern play is

affected by a chord change that occurs part way through a

pattern. When “On” is selected, the pattern “retriggers,” which

causes the currently playing note to change to the

corresponding note of the newly fingered chord. When “Off” is

selected, a chord change causes the currently sounding note

to be cut off, and the next note of the pattern of the newly

fingered chord to be played.

■Bend Range (BndRng)

This parameter specifies the bend range for pitch bend wheel

operation in semitone steps.

While editing a rhythm in the Rhythm Editing

Mode, press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT

MENU).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Rhythm”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Volume”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

the menu item you want to change.

*1 See “Reverb Effect List” (page EN-23).

*2 See “Chorus Effect List” (page EN-24).

*3 See “Delay Effect List” (page EN-24).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Operations Affecting All the

Accompaniment Patterns in a

Rhythm

To configure mixer settings for a rhythm

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Volume

(Volume)

Adjusts the overall rhythm

volume.

0 to 127

Reverb Type

(Reverb)

Specifies the reverb type to

be applied to the entire

rhythm.

Chorus Type

(Chorus)

Specifies the chorus type to

be applied to the entire

rhythm.

Delay Type

(Delay)

Specifies the delay type to

be applied to the entire

rhythm.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 88 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-89

Creating an Auto Accompaniment (User Rhythm)

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To configure

mixer settings for a rhythm” (page EN-88).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “All Clear”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the batch clear

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Select the user rhythm you want to rename.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until “Rhy

Name” appears.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays the renaming screen.

Input the new name.

• See “Text Character Input” (page EN-15) for

information about how to enter text.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the rename

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Select the user rhythm you want to copy.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until “Rhy

Name” appears.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Rhy Copy”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

copy destination rhythm number and then

press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

• If there is already a user rhythm stored at the rhythm

number you specified as the copy destination, the

message “Replace?” will appear.

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the copy

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the copy operation is being performed. Do not perform

any operation while this message is on the display.

“Complete” appears on the display after the operation

is complete.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Select the user rhythm you want to delete.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until “Rhy

Name” appears.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Rhy Clr”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to delete or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel the delete operation.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

To batch clear data recorded in all the

accompaniment patterns of a rhythm

To rename a user rhythm

To copy a user rhythm

To delete a user rhythm

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 89 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-90

You can use the MIDI recorder for real-time recording of your

Digital Keyboard play.

• You can record up to 10 songs in Digital Keyboard memory.

Recorded content is saved in Song Bank song numbers 31

to 40 (user songs).

• One song can have up to 999 measures, or a total of

approximately 40,000 notes in all of its tracks. Recording

stops automatically when either of these limits is reached.

• You can play along with a recorded song on the keyboard.

• CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. takes no responsibility

for any damages, lost profits, or claims by third parties

arising from the deletion of recorded data due to

malfunction, repair, or for any other reason.

■MIDI Recorder

Keyboard performance information is recorded as MIDI data*

to a system track or 16 solo tracks (storage areas for

keyboard performance data) in Digital Keyboard memory.

• Keyboard performance information (keyboard keys press/

release, touch pressure, etc.) is recorded as MIDI data.

• The size of MIDI data is much smaller when compared with

audio data, making it easier to edit later on a computer, etc.

• The MIDI recorder sounds the Digital Keyboard’s sound

source based on recorded MIDI data.

* MIDI

MIDI is short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface”. It is a

universal standard that makes it possible for musical

instruments, computers, and other devices to exchange

performance information (keyboard key press/release, touch

pressure, etc.) regardless of manufacturer. Performance data

in this case is called “MIDI data”.

■Recording Track and Recorded Data

●System Track

Records operations of the various different performance

functions of the Digital Keyboard, including Auto

Accompaniment, phrase pads, layer, split, etc.

●Solo Tracks 1 to 16

Record keyboard play using one tone (UPPER 1).

These tracks can be overdubbed as shown below.

The data recorded to each track is shown below.

■Saving to an External Device

Songs recorded with the MIDI recorder can be saved to a

USB flash drive or a computer. For details, see “To save

Digital Keyboard data to a USB flash drive” (page EN-121)

and “Transferring Data Between the Digital Keyboard and a

Computer” (page EN-125).

Using the MIDI Recorder to

Record

System Recording Recorded Recorded

Solo 1 Empty Recording Recorded

Solo 2 Empty Empty Recorded

…

Solo 16 Empty Empty Recording

This type

of track: Records this:

System

Track

Keyboard play, tone number (UPPER 1,

UPPER 2, LOWER 1, LOWER 2), rhythm

number, tempo, time signature, rhythm

controller operations, chord specification,

phrase pad operations, Auto Accompaniment

volume, effect settings (reverb, chorus, delay),

layer, split, auto harmonize/arpeggiator play,

scale settings (preset scale type and root,

scale fine tune, Auto Accompaniment scale

on/off setting), part fine tune, part coarse tune,

octave shift setting, pedal operations, pitch

bend wheel operations, bend range setting,

mixer settings, PORTAMENT button

operations, SUSTAIN button operations

CT-X5000: MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE

button operations (vibrato, DSP parameter

setting)

Solo Tracks Keyboard play, tone number (UPPER 1),

arpeggiator play, octave shift setting, pedal

operations, pitch bend wheel operations, bend

range setting, part fine tune, part coarse tune,

mixer settings, PORTAMENT button

operations, SUSTAIN button operations

CT-X5000: MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE

button operations (vibrato, DSP parameter

setting)

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 90 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-91

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

Recording can be stared from either of the modes below.

●Rhythm Mode

Press 8RECORD/STOP and then play something on the

keyboard to start recording. This makes it quick and easy to

start recording to the system track.

●Song Bank Mode

After first selecting a recording destination song number,

press 8RECORD/STOP to start recording.

Note that what happens when you press 8RECORD/

STOP depends on which of the above modes you are in. Try

performing the operations below before you start to record.

Press 6RHYTHM to enter the Rhythm Mode.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This enters recording standby and causes the

[RECORD] indicator to flash.

• You can select a rhythm and tone.

• Recording starts when you play something on the

keyboard. Pressing ck START/STOP starts the

rhythm and recording at the same time.

Long-press 8RECORD/STOP.

This displays the recording setting screen and displays

“RecTrkSy”.

The [RECORD] indicator continues to flash.

• Pressing ck START/STOP starts recording, but does

not start rhythm play. Use this method to start

recording when you want to insert rests at the

beginning.

• On this screen, you can configure recording settings,

such as the recording destination track, etc.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This returns to recording standby.

To exit recording standby, press 8RECORD/

STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

• Recording using this operation automatically selects

the lowest song number (31 to 40) that does not have

anything recorded to it yet as the recording

destination.

Press 7SONG BANK to enter the Song Bank

Mode.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select a song number from 31 to 40

(user recording).

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This displays the recording setting screen and displays

“RecTrkSy”.

• This is the same display as the one that appears on

step 3 under “When starting from the Rhythm Mode”

above.

Press 8RECORD/STOP again.

This enters recording standby.

• This is the same display as the one that appears on

step 2 under “When starting from the Rhythm Mode”

above.

• Here, long-press 8RECORD/STOP to return to the

recording setting screen.

To exit recording standby, press 8RECORD/

STOP again.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

Starting a Recording

When starting from the Rhythm Mode

When starting from the Song Bank Mode

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 91 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-92

• The [RECORD] indicator will start to flash during recording

when the number of remaining note count is 100 or lower.

When there are no more remaining notes, recording stops

automatically and the [RECORD] indicator disappears.

• To make a new recording by selecting the recording

destination song number first, see “To change the recording

destination song number during recording standby” (page

EN-95).

• You can configure settings to sound a pre-count before

recording starts or the metronome while recording is in

progress. See “To sound a pre-count or the metronome”

(page EN-95).

• You can exit recording standby at any time ([RECORD]

indicator flashing) by pressing 8RECORD/STOP once

or twice so the [RECORD] indicator is not displayed.

Press 6RHYTHM.

Specify the tempo to use at the start of

recording.

• See “Changing Auto Accompaniment Speed (Tempo)”

(page EN-46).

Select the rhythm and tone you want to use at

the start of recording.

• See “Selecting a Rhythm” (page EN-43) and

“Selecting a Tone” (page EN-18).

• If you want to change mixer settings of each of the

system track parts, perform the procedure under “To

configure mixer settings” (page EN-64). Configure the

mixer settings of each part of the KEYBOARD part

group.

• Layer and split settings, as well as other settings are

also recorded. For details about recorded data, see

“Recording Track and Recorded Data” (page EN-90).

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This enters recording standby.

• The [SONG] and [SYSTEM] indicators are also

displayed at this time, and the mixer part indicators

( to ) all start to flash. This indicates that the

system track is the recording target.

Playing on the keyboard automatically starts

recording.

• Pressing ck START/STOP starts the rhythm and

recording at the same time.

• While recording is in progress, the number of

measures since recording started is indicated in the

upper right corner of the display.

When you are finished recording, press

8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

• Pressing ck PLAY/STOP will play back the recorded

data.

• Recording using the above operation automatically selects

the lowest song number (31 to 40) that does not have

anything recorded to it yet as the recording destination.

Recording Keyboard Play

To record a new system track

Flashing

Displayed

Measure Beat

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 92 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-93

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

Specify the tempo to use at the start of

recording.

• See “Changing Auto Accompaniment Speed (Tempo)”

(page EN-46).

Select the tone you want to use at the start of

recording.

• See “Selecting a Tone” (page EN-18).

• You cannot use layer or split when recording.

• If you want to change mixer settings of solo track being

recorded, perform the procedure under “To configure

mixer settings” (page EN-64). Configure the mixer

settings of the UPPER 1 part of the KEYBOARD part

group.

• For details about data recorded to the solo track, see

“Recording Track and Recorded Data” (page EN-90).

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This enters recording standby.

• The [SONG] and [SYSTEM] indicators are also

displayed at this time, and mixer part indicators to

all start to flash. This indicates that the system

track is the recording target.

Select the solo track to which you want to

record.

(1) Long-press 8RECORD/STOP.

• This displays the recording setting screen that you

can use to select the recording target track.

• “RecTrkSy” indicates that the current recording

target track is the system track.

(2) Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to display the

[SONG] and [SOLO] indicators, and select the solo

track to which you want to record.

• “RecTrk” indicates that the current recording target

track is a solo track, and the number is the track

number.

• At this time, the corresponding mixer part number

( to ) also flashes.

(3) Press 8RECORD/STOP to return to recording

standby.

• To insert a rest at the beginning of the recording,

press ck START/STOP in place of

8RECORD/STOP. This starts recording and

inserts rests until you play something on the

keyboard.

Playing on the keyboard automatically starts

recording.

When you are finished recording, press

8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

• Pressing ck PLAY/STOP will play back the recorded

data.

To record a new solo track

Flashing

Displayed

RecTr kSy

Displayed

RecTr k 1

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 93 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-94

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the song you

want to overdub.

• Select a user recording song that has at least one

track recorded.

Select the tone you want to use at the start of

recording.

(1) Press 5TONE.

(2) Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the bl

dial to select the number of the tone.

• You cannot use layer or split when recording.

• For details about data recorded to the solo track,

see “Recording Track and Recorded Data” (page

EN-90).

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This enters recording standby.

• At this time, “RecTrkSy” is displayed along with the

[SONG] and [SYSTEM] indicators. Also, mixer part

indicators to all start to flash. This indicates

that the system track is the recording target.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to display the

[SONG] and [SOLO] indicators, and select the

solo track to which you want to record.

• While the [SONG] and [SOLO] indicators are

displayed, mixer part indicators to indicate the

status of the solo tracks. A displayed indicator means

that a solo track is recorded, while a flashing indicator

means that the solo track is the recording target.

• Selecting a track that is already recorded causes the

current data of that track to be overwritten by the new

recording.

Press 8RECORD/STOP to enter recording

standby.

• To insert a rest at the beginning of the recording, press

ck START/STOP in place of 8RECORD/STOP.

Starting playback of another track that is already

recorded simultaneously starts recording and inserts

rests until you play something on the keyboard.

Playing on the keyboard automatically starts

recording.

Starting playback of a recorded track simultaneously

starts recording to the track you selected in step 5.

When you are finished recording, press

8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

• Pressing ck PLAY/STOP will play back the recorded

data.

Repeat steps 3 through 8 above for each of the

tracks you want to overdub.

To overdub another solo track while playing

back recorded tracks

Flashing

Displayed

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 94 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-95

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

• If you started the operation from the Rhythm Mode,

this enters recording standby. Advance to step 2.

• If you started the operation from the Song Bank Mode,

the Digital Keyboard will display the recording setting

screen, so step 2 is not necessary. Proceed to step 3.

• For information about the recording standby and

recording setting screen, see “Starting a Recording”

(page EN-91).

Long-press 8RECORD/STOP.

This displays the recording setting screen and displays

“RecTrkSy”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “MltRec 1”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the song to which you want to

record.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This exits the recording setting screen and returns to

recording standby.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

• If you started the operation from the Rhythm Mode,

this enters recording standby. Advance to step 2.

• If you started the operation from the Song Bank Mode,

the Digital Keyboard will display the recording setting

screen, so step 2 is not necessary. Proceed to step 3.

• For information about the recording standby and

recording setting screen, see “Starting a Recording”

(page EN-91).

Long-press 8RECORD/STOP.

This displays the recording setting screen and displays

“RecTrkSy”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display the menu item whose setting you

want to change.

• Initial default setting values are indicated by an

asterisk (*).

Use bn [–] and [+] to change the setting.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This exits recording setting screen and returns to

recording standby.

To change the recording destination song

number during recording standby

RecTr kSy

l t R e c 1

To sound a pre-count or the metronome

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Precount

(Precount)

Specifies whether or not to

sound a pre-count before

recording starts after you

press ck START/STOP

while the recording setting

screen is displayed.

On: Sounds a one-measure

pre-count.

Off: Recording starts as

soon as you press

ck START/STOP or play

something on the keyboard,

without sounding a pre-

count.

On, Off*

Metronome

(Metronom)

On: Sounds the metronome

while recording.

Off: Disables the

metronome.

On, Off*

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 95 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-96

The recording operations described in the table below can be

performed on a recorded track.

Use fast forward and fast reverse to navigate to the location

where you want to start overdubbing or punch-in recording,

and then start recording. If you know the start point and end

point of the section you want to re-record, you can also play

back the song and start performing at the desired location.

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the song that

contains the track where you want to perform

overdubbing or punch-in recording.

Press 8RECORD/STOP.

This displays the recording setting screen and causes

the [RECORD] indicator to flash.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Rec Type”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to display

either of the settings below.

This causes “MEASURE” and “BEAT” to flash in the

upper right corner of the display.

• If you want to change mixer settings while recording,

perform the procedure under “To configure mixer settings”

(page EN-64). When recording to the system track,

configure the mixer settings of each part of the SONG

SYSTEM part group. When recording to a solo track,

configure the mixer settings of the corresponding part of the

SONG SOLO part group. (For example, when recording to

Solo Track 3, configure the mixer settings of Part 3 of the

SONG SOLO part group.)

Press ck PLAY/STOP.

This starts song playback.

• Here, you could jump to step 9 of this procedure and

immediately start recording.

• To stop the overdub recording/punch-in recording

operation, press ck PLAY/STOP again. This will

cause the [RECORD] indicator to disappear from the

display.

Use bsdFF and brsREW to navigate to

the location from which you want to start

recording.

•Use btkPAUSE to pause or unpause song

playback.

• After step 8, playing something on the keyboard in

step 9 will start recording. After determining the point

where you want to start recording, navigate to a

location just before it, and then advance to step 9.

Press cm ACCOMP.

This causes “MEASURE” and “BEAT” to flash at high

speed in the upper right corner of the display. If playback

is paused, it becomes unpaused at this time.

• If you are recording to the system track, rhythm

operation buttons become enabled at this time.

Use one of the operations below to start

recording.

• Play something on the keyboard.

• If you are performing punch-in recording, you can also

start recording by pressing cp STORE. In this case,

rests are inserted at the beginning of the song until you

start playing something on the keyboard.

This will cause the “MEASURE” and “BEAT” indicators to

stop flashing. The [RECORD] indicator also appears.

10.

When you are finished recording, press

8RECORD/STOP.

This causes the [RECORD] indicator to disappear.

Re-recording Part of a Recorded

Track (Overdubbing, Punch-in

Recording)

Overdub

Recording

Records by adding performance data to a

recorded track, without deleting the

previously recorded data.

Punch-in

Recording

Used for re-recording of specific parts of a

song to correct errors, etc.

To perform overdubbing or punch-in

recording

To perform this operation: Display this:

Overdub Recording Over Dub

Punch-in Recording Punch In

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 96 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-97

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

Perform the procedure under “Looping

Playback of Specific Song Measures (A-B

Repeat)” (page EN-40).

• When performing the procedure, select the number of

the song that contains the track where you want to

perform overdubbing or punch-in recording.

Perform steps 3 to 7 under “To perform

overdubbing or punch-in recording” (page

EN-96).

Press cm ACCOMP.

This causes “MEASURE” and “BEAT” to flash at high

speed in the upper right corner of the display.

Recording will start automatically when

playback reaches the start of the section you

specified in step 1.

This will cause the “MEASURE” and “BEAT” indicators to

stop flashing. The [RECORD] indicator also appears.

• Play the required notes on the keyboard.

When playback reaches the end of the

specified section, the [RECORD] indicator will

disappear and recording will stop

automatically.

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the song number of a

recorded song.

• Select the song you want to playback from among

song numbers 31 to 40 (MltRec 1 to MltRec 10).

Press ck PLAY/STOP.

This starts song playback.

• Operations that are supported during playback are

almost the same as those for built-in song playback

(with some exceptions). See “Playing a Built-in Song

or a Song on a USB Flash Drive (Song Bank Mode)”

(page EN-39).

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the song number of a

recorded song.

Press bo PART SELECT.

This displays “TrSyMute”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to select the track you want to mute.

Use bn [–] or [+] to mute or unmute the track

you selected in step 4.

• Pressing bn [+] mutes the track, while bn [–] unmutes

the track.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 as required for other

tracks.

Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Press ck PLAY/STOP.

• This starts song playback in accordance with the track

mute/unmute settings you configured.

To stop song playback, press ck PLAY/STOP.

• You can perform overdub recording while some tracks

are muted. After performing the operation above,

perform the procedure starting from step 3 under “To

overdub another solo track while playing back

recorded tracks” (page EN-94).

To specify the recording start point and end

point, and then perform overdubbing or

punch-in recording

Playing Back a Recorded Song

To play back a recorded song

To mute specific tracks

TrS

ute

Current setting Setting name (Indicates system track)

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 97 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-98

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the song you

want to copy.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until “Song

Clr” appears.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “SongCopy”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

copy destination song number and then press

[6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

• If there is already a user recording stored at the song

number you specified as the copy destination, the

message “Replace?” will appear.

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the copy

operation or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• The message “Wait...” remains on the display while

the copy operation is being performed. Do not perform

any operation while this message is on the display.

“Complete” appears on the display after the operation

is complete.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the song you

want to delete.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until “Song

Clr” appears.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to delete or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel the delete operation.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the song that

contains the track you want to delete.

Hold down 8RECORD/STOP until “Song

Clr” appears.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “TrkSyClr”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

track you want to delete.

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to delete or bn [–] (NO) to

cancel the delete operation.

Repeat steps 5 through 7 above for each of the

tracks you want to delete.

To exit the operation, press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

Copying a Recorded Song,

Deleting a Recorded Song or

Track

To copy a recorded song

To delete a recorded song

To delete a specific track from a recorded

song

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 98 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-99

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

Enter the Song Editing Mode to perform the operations below.

• Editing an entire song in measure units (page EN-99)

• Editing a recorded song in track units (page EN-101)

• Editing a track of a recorded song in measure units (page

EN-103)

• Editing a recorded song in event units (page EN-105)

• Inputting notes and chords one-by-one (page EN-108)

• Recorded song mixer settings (page EN-111)

Press 7SONG BANK.

Use the bm number keys, bn [–] and [+], or the

bl dial to select the number of the song you

want to edit.

Long-press bk FUNCTION until the [EDIT]

indicator appears.

• This enters the Song Editing Mode and “Song”

appears on the display.

• Perform the operation below at the end of Song Editing

Mode operation.

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the Song Editing

Mode operation, or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays the message “Wait...”

(operation in progress). Do not perform any operation

while this message is on the display. “Complete”

appears on the display after the operation is complete.

To exit the Song Editing Mode, long-press the

[4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Use the procedure below to edit an entire song (all of the

tracks included in the song) in measure units.

• In the procedure below, you specify a start measure (Point

A or simply Point), and an end measure (Point B). The

section specified by the procedure under “Looping

Playback of Specific Song Measures (A-B Repeat)” (page

EN-40) is used as the initial default for these settings.

• Performing this operation makes the measures within the

specified range blank measures. It does not affect the total

number of measures in the song.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Clear”.

Press [6] (ENTER) again.

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to clear, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to clear, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

Song Editing Mode

To enter the Song Editing Mode

To exit the Song Editing Mode operation

Displayed

Editing an Entire Song in Measure

Units (Song Editing)

To clear a specific range of measures within

a song

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 99 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-100

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Clear”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Copy”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to copy, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to copy, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “DstPoint”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the copy

destination, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Clear”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Insert”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

measure from which you want to insert blank

measures, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Length”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to specify the

number of blank measures you want to insert,

and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

To copy an entire song in measure units and

insert them into a specified location of the

same song

To insert blank measures at a specified

location in a song

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 100 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-101

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

• Performing this procedure deletes the measures in the

specified range, shifting the measures following the deleted

range forward to fill in the space that is created. The total

number of measures in the song is reduced by the number

of measures that are deleted.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key.

This displays “Clear”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Delete”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to delete, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to delete, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

The editing operations in this section affect an entire track in a

recorded song.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “WholeTrk”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Clear”.

Press [6] (ENTER) again.

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

target track, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

To delete a specific range of measures from a

song Editing a Recorded Song in Track

Units

To delete a specified track

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 101 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-102

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “WholeTrk”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Clear”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Copy”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “SrcTrk 1”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

source track of the copy operation, and then

press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “DstTrk 1”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

destination track of the copy operation, and

then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

• The operation below deletes only the data in the table

below from the specified tracks.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “WholeTrk”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Clear”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to select the

data you want to delete.

• If you selected “AcompClr”, advance to step 6. If you

selected anything else, advance to step 4.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Trk Sy”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

target track.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

To copy a specified solo track to another

solo track

To delete specific data from a specified track

Target Track Deleted Data

System Track Note events

Accompaniment operation data

All data except accompaniment

operations and note events

Solo track Note events

All data except note events

To delete this: Display this:

Note events Note Clr

System track accompaniment

operation data

AcompClr

All data except system track

accompaniment operations and note

events

OtherClr

All data except solo track note events

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 102 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-103

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

You can quantize, key shift, delete, or perform other

operations in measure units for each track included in a

recorded song.

• Quantize automatically corrects the timing of notes

recorded in a track to match a note value being used as the

quantize reference (note event note on timing).

• Key shift offsets the pitch of recorded notes (note events) in

semitone steps.

• In the procedure below, you specify a start measure (Point

A or simply Point), and an end measure (Point B). The

section specified by “Looping Playback of Specific Song

Measures (A-B Repeat)” (page EN-40) is used as the initial

default for this specification.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Trk Meas”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Quantize”.

Press [6] (ENTER) again.

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

target track, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to quantize, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to quantize, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Value”.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

note value to be used as the quantize reference

note.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Trk Meas”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Quantize”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“KeyShift”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

target track, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to key shift, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to key shift, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Value”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to specify the

key shift setting value.

• You can specify a value of the range of –24 to 24.

Lowering the setting value by one lowers the pitch by

one semitone, while raising the value raises the pitch.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

Editing a Track of a Recorded

Song in Measure Units

To quantize a specified track in measure

units

Display Description

4, 8, 16, 32 Quarter note, eighth note, sixteenth

note, thirty-second note

4d, 8d, 16d, 32d Dotted notes

4t, 8t, 16t, 32t Triplet notes

To key shift a specified track in measure

units

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 103 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-104

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Trk Meas”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Quantize”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Clear”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

target track, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to delete, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to delete, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Trk Meas”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Quantize”.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Copy”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

target track, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point A”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the range you

want to copy, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Point B”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the last measure of the range you

want to copy, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “DstPoint”.

Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to select the

number of the first measure of the copy

destination, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Perform the procedure under “To exit the Song

Editing Mode operation” (page EN-99).

To delete a specified track in measure units To copy a specified track in measure units

and insert them into a specified location of

the same track

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 104 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-105

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

The MIDI recorder records operations as data called “events”.

For example, pressing a keyboard key causes multiple events

to be recorded: the timing of the key press, the pressed key

(pitch), press time (note length), and key pressure (note

volume).

Event editing can be used to edit the events below.

• Note events

• Tone number events

• Rhythm number events (system track only)

• Auto Accompaniment chord events (system track only)

During event editing, you can use the [2] (w) or [5] (q) bm

number keys to scroll between individual events. Each event

appears on the display as described below.

■Note Events

With this Digital Keyboard, you can edit the following three

note event parameters: note number, velocity, and gate time.

If a note event is displayed during event editing, the first

parameter that appears is the note number.

●Note Number Display

Each press of the [1] (V) or [3] (W) bm number key

switches the displayed note event to another parameter.

●Velocity Display

●Gate Time (Beat) Display

●Gate Time (Tick) Display

■Tone Number Event

The tone number is displayed by the event name “Tone”.

■Rhythm Number Event

The rhythm number is displayed by the event name “Rhythm”.

■Auto Accompaniment Chord Event

Only the chord root and type of Auto Accompaniment chords

are displayed.

An event named “NonChord” is displayed when a chord is

configured not to sound.

■End of Track

“EOT” (End Of Track) is displayed when the end of the target

track (part) is reached.

Editing a Recorded Song in Event

Units (Event Editor)

Event Display

Note number Note name

V e l o c i t y

GateBeat

GateTi ck

Tone

Tone number Event name

Rhyth

Rhythm number Event name

Root Type

EOT

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 105 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-106

The ranges of the event settings are shown in the table below.

*1 CT-X5000: 1 to 393, CT-X3000: 1 to 343

*2 See “Auto Accompaniment Chord Event” (page EN-105).

*3 All chord types that can be fingered on the accompaniment

keyboard or “NonChord”. See “Fingering Guide” (page

A-2).

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “TrkEvent”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

event edit target track, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays the [EVENT] indicator to the left of the

[EDIT] indicator.

• This displays the event at the beginning of the track.

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the event whose parameters you want

to change.

• Event location information (measure, beat, tick) is

shown on the right side of the display.

• Displaying a note event causes a confirmation tone

(the note of the note event) to sound.

• While editing the system track, one of the indicators

below will be displayed. The displayed indicator

indicates the part where the displayed event is

recorded.

Depending on the event you are editing,

perform one of the procedures below.

• For information about event status indicators and how

to interpret indicators, see “Event Display” (page

EN-105).

• Pressing ck PLAY/STOP while editing an event will

play back the recorded data from the beginning of the

measure that includes the displayed event.

YNote Events

(1) Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display a note event.

(2) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display the

parameter you want to change.

(3) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value of the displayed parameter.

• You can also use the keyboard to specify note

numbers.

• The gate time beat (GateBeat) can be specified in

the range of 0 to 340 for a song with a time

signature from 2/4 to 8/4, and in the range of 0 to

680 for a song with a time signature from 2/8 to

16/8.

• The gate time tick (GateTick) can be specified in

the range of 0 to 95 for a song with a time

signature from 2/4 to 8/4, and in the range of 0 to

47 for a song with a time signature from 2/8 to

16/8.

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) for each of the parameters

you want to change.

• While a note event is displayed, you can use the [2] (w)

and [5] (q) bm number keys to scroll between events. If

the event you scroll to is a note event, the same parameter

remains displayed.

Event Setting Ranges

Event Parameter (Display) Settings

Notes Note Number (C1 to G9) 0 to 127

Velocity (Velocity) 1 to 127

Gate Time Beat (GateBeat) 0 to 340

Gate Time Tick (GateTick) 0 to 95

Tone

Number

Tone Number (Tone) 1 to 900

Rhythm

Number

Rhythm Number (Rhythm) *1

Chord Chord type or “NonChord”*2*3

To edit an event

Displayed

Part Display

UPPER 1

UPPER 2

LOWER 1

LOWER 2

Auto Harmonize

Phrase Pad 1 to 4 to

Measure Beat

Tick

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 106 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-107

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

YTone Number Events

(1) Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display “Tone” (Tone Number Event).

(2) If you want to check the name of the tone assigned to

the event, press bk FUNCTION.

• This displays the tone name. If you want to leave

the tone name displayed while changing the tone

number, go to step (3).

•Press bk FUNCTION again to return to the

“Tone” display.

(3) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the tone

number.

• To jump between categories, hold down

4CATEGORY and press bn [–] (first tone in the

previous category) or [+] (first tone in the next

category).

YRhythm Number Event (System Track Only)

(1) Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display “Rhythm” (Rhythm Number Event).

(2) If you want to check the name of the rhythm

assigned to the event, press bk FUNCTION.

• This displays the rhythm name. If you want to

leave the rhythm name displayed while changing

the rhythm number, go to step (3).

•Press bk FUNCTION again to return to the

“Rhythm” display.

(3) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

rhythm number.

• To jump between categories, hold down

4CATEGORY and press bn [–] (first rhythm in

the previous category) or [+] (first rhythm in the

next category).

YChord Event (System Track Only)

(1) Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display a chord event.

(2) If there is no [ACCOMP] indicator displayed, press

cm ACCOMP to display it.

(3) Play the chord you want on the accompaniment

keyboard.

• This changes the chord type to the chord you play.

• For details about chord fingering modes, see

“Changing Accompaniment Keyboard Settings”

(page EN-48).

To exit the event editing operation, press the

[4] (EXIT) bm number key.

To exit the Song Editing Mode, long-press the

[4] (EXIT) bm number key again.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Perform steps 2 and 3 under “To edit an event”

(page EN-106).

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the event you want to delete.

Press the [9] (DELETE) bm number key.

• This deletes the displayed event.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Perform steps 2 and 3 under “To edit an event”

(page EN-106).

Press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT MENU).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “KeyShift”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Perform steps 5 through 9 under “To key shift

a specified track in measure units” (page

EN-103).

Displayed

To delete an event

To key shift events in measure units

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 107 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-108

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Perform steps 2 and 3 under “To edit an event”

(page EN-106).

Press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT MENU).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Clear”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Perform steps 5 through 7 under “To delete a

specified track in measure units” (page

EN-104).

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Perform steps 2 and 3 under “To edit an event”

(page EN-106).

Press cs REGISTRATION [8] (EDIT MENU).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Copy”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Perform steps 5 through 8 under “To copy a

specified track in measure units and insert

them into a specified location of the same

track” (page EN-104).

Step input is an event editor function. You can use step input

to specify the length and pitch of each individual note (note

event). In the system track, you also can perform step input of

Auto Accompaniment chords (chord events) as well.

• Performing step input into a track that already contains

recorded data will not delete the existing data. This means

you can use step input to add to existing recorded data.

• During step input, use the cs REGISTRATION buttons to

input notes, rests, etc.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Perform steps 2 and 3 under “To edit an event”

(page EN-106), and confirm that the [EVENT]

indicator is displayed.

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the event within the measure from

which you want to start step input.

• The step input start point is the beginning of the

measure.

Press cs REGISTRATION [1].

This displays the [STEP] indicator and enters the Step

Input Mode.

• During a step input operation, the current input point

(measure, beat, tick) is shown on the right side of the

display.

To delete events in measure units

To copy events in measure units

Inputting Notes and Chords One-

by-one (Step Input)

To input note events using step input

Displayed

Measure

Note Value

Beat

Tick

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 108 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-109

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

When you are editing the system track, you

can specify the event input target part.

• See “Selecting a System Track Part” (page EN-110).

• This step is not necessary when you are editing a solo

track. Proceed to step 6.

If necessary, specify the velocity (keyboard

touch) and gate time rate (actual length) of the

note event you are about to input.

• The velocity and gate time rate settings you specify

here are applied to all of the note events you input until

you change them.

• Velocity can be specified as a value (1 to 127) or by

actually pressing a key (which sets a velocity in

accordance with your key pressure). The initial default

is 100.

• The gate time rate specifies the note length as a

percentage (1 to 100%) of the note value you specify

in step 7. For example, when the gate time rate is 80%

(initial default), a quarter note (96 ticks) becomes 76

ticks (96×0.8=76.8, decimal part cut off).

*When “Key On” is selected, the velocity of the keyboard

press when inputting the note event is reflected in the

velocity value.

Specify the note value (event length) of the

event you are about to input in step 8.

*1 If you want to input a dotted note or triplet note, first press

a key from [1] to [6], and then press [7] or [8]. To input a

dotted quarter note, for example, press [3] and then [7].

• The note value specified in accordance with the key

input will appear on the right side of the display.

Specify the event to be input.

*2 Extends the length of the previously input note event. For

example, if you input a quarter note event and wish to

extend it by an eighth note, perform the following button

operation: bm number key [4] (eighth note) -

cs REGISTRATION [3] (Tie).

• Inputting an event advances the input point by the note

value amount you specified in step 7.

Repeat steps 5 through 8 as required.

• The operation in step 5 is not necessary as long as the

target part remains the same.

10.

To exit the Step Input Mode, press

cs REGISTRATION [1].

This causes the [STEP] indicator to disappear.

To specify this: Perform this operation:

Velocity (1) Press cs REGISTRATION [4].

(2) Use bn [–] and [+], or the bl dial to

specify a value or select “Key

On”.*

(3) Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number

key.

Gate Time Rate (1) Press cs REGISTRATION [5].

(2) Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to

specify a percent value.

(3) Press the [4] (EXIT) bm number

key.

To input this note value: Press this bm number key:

Whole [1]

Half [2]

Quarter [3]

Eighth [4]

Sixteenth [5]

Thirty-second [6]

Dotted note*1[7]

Triplet*1[8]

To input this: Perform this operation:

Note event After specifying a note value in step 7,

press the keyboard key for the note

you want to input. Pressing multiple

keyboard keys at the same time inputs

a chord.

Rest After specifying a note value in step 7,

press cs REGISTRATION [2].

Tie*2After specifying a note value of a note

to tie with the previous note event in

step 7, press cs REGISTRATION

[3].

226

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 109 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

EN-110

■Selecting a System Track Part

When the system track is specified as the event edit target

track, you can use the buttons below to select the part to be

edited. You can find out the selection status of each part by

checking for the indicators shown in the “Display” column of

the table.

• The UPPER 1 and UPPER 2 parts can be selected at the

same time. The LOWER 1 and LOWER 2 parts can be

selected at the same time. Step inputting an event while

two parts are selected will simultaneously input the same

event into both parts.

• Auto harmonize part and the parts of phrase pads 1

through 4 can only be selected individually. Selecting these

parts will cause the indicators of the other parts to

disappear.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “TrkEvent”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

This displays “Trk Sy”

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

system track, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays the [EVENT] indicator.

If there is no [ACCOMP] indicator displayed,

press cm ACCOMP to display it.

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the event within the measure from

which you want to start step input.

• The step input start point is the beginning of the

measure.

Press cs REGISTRATION [1].

This displays the [STEP] indicator and enters the Step

Input Mode.

If necessary, specify the chord event velocity

(keyboard touch).

• For information about how to specify the setting, see

step 6 under “To input note events using step input”

(page EN-108).

Specify the event length of the event you will

input in step 9.

• For information about how to specify the setting, see

step 7 under “To input note events using step input”

(page EN-108).

Specify the event to be input.

*1 For details about chord fingering modes, see “Changing

Accompaniment Keyboard Settings” (page EN-48).

*2 For information about how to specify this setting, see step

8 under “To input note events using step input” (page

EN-108).

10.

Repeat steps 7 through 9 as required.

To select this

part: Press this button: Display

UPPER 1 cs REGISTRATION [7]

UPPER 2 dq UPPER LAYER

LOWER 1 dp SPLIT

LOWER 2 dq UPPER LAYER

(Long-press)

Auto

Harmonize do AUTO HARMONIZE

Phrase Pad 1 cq PHRASE PAD [P1]

Phrase Pad 2 cq PHRASE PAD [P2]

Phrase Pad 3 cq PHRASE PAD [P3]

Phrase Pad 4 cq PHRASE PAD [P4]

To input chord events using step input

To input this: Perform this operation:

Chord Event After specifying an event length in step 8,

use the accompaniment keyboard to

specify a chord.*1

Rest

(NonChord)

After specifying an event length in step 8,

press cs REGISTRATION [2].

Tie*2After specifying the event length of a

chord to tie with the previous chord event

in step 8, press cs REGISTRATION [3].

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 110 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-111

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record

11.

To exit the Step Input Mode, press

cs REGISTRATION [1].

This causes the [STEP] indicator to disappear.

You can configure the mixer settings of each part of the

system track and the solo tracks of a recorded song.

Perform the procedure under “To enter the

Song Editing Mode” (page EN-99).

Long-press 9PART (MIXER) until the

[MIXER] indicator appears.

• To configure the mixer settings of the system track,

configure the settings of each part of the SONG

SYSTEM part group. To configure the mixer settings of

a solo track, configure the settings of each part of the

SONG SOLO part group. For information about the

parts within a part group, see “List of Parts for Each

Mixer Part Group” (page EN-65).

Select the part group whose mixer settings you

want to configure.

(1) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is lit.

(2) Use bn [–] and [+] to select the part group (SONG

SYSTEM or SONG SOLO) whose settings you want

to configure.

(3) Press 9PART and confirm that the lamp to the left

of the button is unlit.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to select the part whose settings you want to

configure with the mixer.

Use the [2] (w) and [5] (q) bm number keys to

display the menu item you want to change.

• Initial default setting values are indicated by an

asterisk (*).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the

setting value.

When mixer settings are the way you want,

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

Recorded Song Mixer Settings

To configure the mixer settings of a recorded

song

Item Name

(Display) Description Settings

Part On/Off

(Part)

Specifies on/off for the

selected part.

On*, Off

Tone (Tone) Specifies the tone of the

selected part.

1 to 900

Volume

(Volume)

Adjusts the volume level of

the selected part.

0 to 127*

Pan (Pan) Specifies the stereo pan

position of the selected

part. 0 indicates the center,

while a smaller value shifts

to the left and a larger value

shifts to the right.

–64 to 0* to 63

Coarse Tune

(Coarse)

Shifts the pitch of the part in

semitone steps.

–24 to 0* to 24

Fine Tune

(Fine)

Fine tunes the pitch of the

part in cent units.

–99 to 0* to 99

Bend Range

(Bend Rng)

Adjusts how much the

sound changes when the

pitch bend wheel is rotated.

0 to 2* to 24

Reverb Send

(Rev Send)

Specifies how much reverb

is applied to the selected

part.

0 to 40* to 127

Chorus Send

(Cho Send)

Specifies how much chorus

is applied to the selected

part.

0* to 127

Delay Send

(Dly Send)

Specifies how much delay

is applied to the selected

part.

0* to 127

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 111 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-112

Use the procedures in this section to configure master Digital Keyboard settings. The procedure uses the bk FUNCTION button.

• When power is turned off by pressing 1P (power) or by triggering of Auto Power Off (page EN-9) while Auto Resume

(page EN-10) is turned off, all settings, except for those below, are returned to their initial defaults.

Equalizer, Tuning, Registration Memory Freeze Target, Pedal 2 type, Expression pedal calibration, Tap rhythm start,

Examination Mode, Display contrast

Press bk FUNCTION.

This displays the [FUNCTION] indicator and the main menu item.

• The display shown here is one example for explanatory purposes. The actual display that appears when you press

bk FUNCTION is different.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys to display the menu item you want to change.

• If the [ENTER] indicator is displayed, execute the steps below. If it is not displayed, advance to step 3.

(1) Press the [6] (ENTER) bm number key. This changes to the sub-menu item display.

(2) Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display the sub-menu for the changes you want to make.

• After the sub-menu item appears, advance to step 3.

• To return to a main menu item from a sub-menu item, press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key.

• If the [ENTER] indicator is displayed while a sub-menu item is displayed, it means there is another sub-menu under the

currently displayed one. In this case, repeat steps (1) and (2).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to change the setting value.

• Pressing the [0] (NUM) bm number key displays the [NUM] indicator, indicating that numeric input with the bm number keys

is enabled (page EN-14). However, a setting item that inputs a value with a decimal part, only the integer part can be input

using the bm number keys. The decimal part must be specified using bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial.

When the setting is the way you want, long-press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the setting screen.

This causes the [FUNCTION] indicator to disappear.

Configuring Function Settings

To configure function settings with the bk FUNCTION button

Touch

Displayed

Current setting value (Or setting value number) Main menu item

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 112 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-113

Configuring Function Settings

Function Setting Item List

Function Name Display Settings See Page

Touch Response Touch 1 to 4 EN-29

Chord Mode ChordMod 1 to 6 EN-50

Phrase Pad Phr Pad – EN-54

Phrase set switching Phr Set 1 to 25 EN-54

Pad 1 Pad 1 –

EN-56

Looped playback Loop On, Off

Key shift KeyShift –24 to 24

Timing sync TimingSy 1 to 3

Chord Sync ChordSyn On, Off

Break point Break Pt 1 to 12

Pad 2*1Pad 2 –

Pad 3*1Pad 3 –

Pad 4*1Pad 4 –

Controllers Cntrller – –

Pedals Pedal –

EN-30

Pedal 1 effect Pd1Efect 1 to 4

Target part for Pedal 1 effect Pd1Enabl –

Pedal 1 effect on/off for tone part UPPER 1 U1Pd1Enb On, Off

Pedal 1 effect on/off for tone part UPPER 2 U2Pd1Enb On, Off

Pedal 1 effect on/off for tone part LOWER 1 L1Pd1Enb On, Off

Pedal 1 effect on/off for tone part LOWER 2 L2Pd1Enb On, Off

Pedal 2 effect Pd2Efect 1 to 4

Target part for Pedal 2 effect Pd2Enabl –

Pedal 2 effect on/off for tone part UPPER 1 U1Pd2Enb On, Off

Pedal 2 effect on/off for tone part UPPER 2 U2Pd2Enb On, Off

Pedal 2 effect on/off for tone part LOWER 1 L1Pd2Enb On, Off

Pedal 2 effect on/off for tone part LOWER 2 L2Pd2Enb On, Off

Pedal 2 type Pd2 Type 1 to 3

Expression pedal calibration ExPCalib –

Pitch Bend PitchBnd –

EN-33

Pitch Bend Range Range 0 to 24

Tone Part UPPER 1 pitch bend on/off U1Enable On, Off

Tone Part UPPER 2 pitch bend on/off U2Enable On, Off

Tone Part LOWER 1 pitch bend on/off L1Enable On, Off

Tone Part LOWER 2 pitch bend on/off L2Enable On, Off

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 113 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-114

Configuring Function Settings

CT-X5000: MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE Mod/Asgn – EN-33

Button operation Btn Act 1 to 2 EN-33

Button function Btn Func 1 to 2 EN-34

Value when modulation is on ModValue 0 to 127 EN-33

Target DSP module DSPModle 1 to 28

EN-34Target DSP parameter DSPParam *2

Value when DSP is on DSPValue –

Target part for MODULATION/ASSIGNABLE button PartEnbl –

EN-34

Tone part UPPER 1 effect on/off U1Enable On, Off

Tone part UPPER 2 effect on/off U2Enable On, Off

Tone part LOWER 1 effect on/off L1Enable On, Off

Tone part LOWER 2 effect on/off L2Enable On, Off

Portamento Portamento –

EN-32

Tone part UPPER 1 portamento time U1 Port. 0 to 127

Tone part UPPER 2 portamento time U2 Port. 0 to 127

Tone part LOWER 1 portamento time L1 Port. 0 to 127

Tone part LOWER 2 portamento time L2 Port. 0 to 127

Sustain Sustain –

EN-32

Tone part UPPER 1 sustain effect size U1 Sus. 0 to 9

Tone part UPPER 2 sustain effect size U2 Sus. 0 to 9

Tone part LOWER 1 sustain effect size L1 Sus. 0 to 9

Tone part LOWER 2 sustain effect size L2 Sus. 0 to 9

Auto Harmonize/Arpeggiator AHar/Arp – EN-27, 52

AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR button assignment BtnAsign 1 to 2 EN-27, 52

Auto Harmonize type AHarType 1 to 12 EN-52

Arpeggiator type Arp Type 1 to 150

EN-27Arpeggiator hold ArpegHld On, Off

Arpeggiator part ArpgPart 1 to 2

Octave Shift Octave –

EN-35

Tone Part UPPER 1 Octave Shift U1 Oct. –3 to 3

Tone Part UPPER 2 Octave Shift U2 Oct. –3 to 3

Tone Part LOWER 1 Octave Shift L1 Oct. –3 to 3

Tone Part LOWER 2 Octave Shift L2 Oct. –3 to 3

Octave Shift button corresponding part Btn Trgt –

Tone Part UPPER 1 button part on/off U1OctBtn On, Off

Tone Part UPPER 2 button part on/off U2OctBtn On, Off

Tone Part LOWER 1 button part on/off L1OctBtn On, Off

Tone Part LOWER 2 button part on/off L2OctBtn On, Off

Function Name Display Settings See Page

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 114 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-115

Configuring Function Settings

Split Split – EN-20, 50

Split Point Split Pt 36 to 96 EN-20

Lower Point Lower Pt 36 to 96 EN-51

Chord Point Chord Pt 36 to 96 EN-51

Chord Input Priority Mode Cd Prior On, Off EN-52

Auto Accompaniment volume AcompVol 0 to 127 EN-45

Song volume Song Vol 0 to 127 EN-40

Tuning Tune – EN-37

Master Digital Keyboard tuning MstrTune 415.5 to 465.9 EN-37

Part coarse tune PrtCoars –

EN-37

Tone part UPPER 1 coarse tune U1CsTune –24 to 24

Tone part UPPER 2 coarse tune U2CsTune –24 to 24

Tone part LOWER 1 coarse tune L1CsTune –24 to 24

Tone part LOWER 2 coarse tune L2CsTune –24 to 24

Part fine tune Prt Fine –

EN-37

Tone part UPPER 1 fine tune U1FnTune –99 to 99

Tone part UPPER 2 fine tune U2FnTune –99 to 99

Tone part LOWER 1 fine tune L1FnTune –99 to 99

Tone part LOWER 2 fine tune L2FnTune –99 to 99

Scales Scale – EN-37

Preset scale type Type 1 to 17 EN-38

Preset scale root Root 1 to 12

Auto Accompaniment scale AcompScl On, Off EN-38

Scale fine tune FineTune –

EN-38

Part fine tune for C notes C Tune –99 to 99

Part fine tune for Db notes DbTune –99 to 99

…

Part fine tune for B notes B Tune –99 to 99

Reverb Reverb *3EN-22

Chorus Chorus *3EN-22

Delay Delay *3EN-22

Equalizer Equalizr *3EN-25

Function Name Display Settings See Page

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 115 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-116

Configuring Function Settings

CT-X5000: Equalizer user settings User EQ –

EN-26

Low-range setting EQ Low –

Low-range cutoff frequency Low Freq 1 to 13

Low-range gain Low Gain –12 to 12

Mid-range 1 setting EQ Mid1 –

Mid-range 1 center frequency Mid1Freq 1 to 20

Mid-range 1 gain Mid1Gain –12 to 12

Mid-range 2 setting EQ Mid2 –

Mid-range 2 center frequency Mid2Freq 1 to 20

Mid-range 2 gain Mid2Gain –12 to 12

High-range setting EQ High –

High-range cutoff frequency HighFreq 1 to 10

High-range gain HighGain –12 to 12

Input level Input Lv 0 to 127

Output level OutputLv 0 to 127

Audio Playback AudioPly –

EN-43

Audio playback looping Repeat On, Off

Audio playback volume Volume 0 to 127

Audio playback Center Cancel C Cancel On, Off

Registration Memory Reg Mem – EN-70

Registration Memory Freeze Target RMFrzTgt –

EN-69

Freeze effect for rhythm on/off Rhythm On, Off

Freeze effect for tempo on/off Tempo On, Off

Freeze effect for tone on/off Tone On, Off

Freeze effect on/off for split point Split Pt On, Off

Freeze effect on/off for auto harmonize/arpeggiator AHar/Arp On, Off

Freeze effect for transpose on/off Trans. On, Off

Freeze effect for scale on/off Scale On, Off

Freeze effect for Touch Response on/off Touch On, Off

Freeze effect for effects on/off Effect On, Off

Freeze effect on/off for coarse tune, fine tune PartTune On, Off

Freeze effect for phrase pads on/off Phr Pad On, Off

Freeze effect for controller on/off Cntrller On, Off

Registration sequence Reg Seq 1 to 3 EN-70

Function Name Display Settings See Page

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 116 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-117

Configuring Function Settings

*1 Includes the same sub-menus as Pad 1.

*2 Depends on the “Target DSP module” (DSPModle) specification.

*3 Setting range depends on the Digital Keyboard model.

*4 Includes sub-menu for USB flash drive operations. For details about the operation, see “USB Flash Drive Operations” (page

EN-121).

Metronome Metronom –

EN-27

Metronome time signature numerator BeatNume 0 to 16

Metronome time signature denominator BeatDeno 1 to 2

Metronome volume Volume 0 to 127

Speakers Speaker –

EN-11Speaker on/off Enabled On, Off

Enabled when PHONES connected PhoneSpk On, Off

MIDI MIDI –

EN-125

Keyboard channel Keybd Ch 1 to 16

Local control Local On, Off

Accomp out AcompOut On, Off

Media*4Media – EN-119

Other Other – –

Tap rhythm start Tap Rhy On, Off EN-46

Right-hand (melody) part channel PartR Ch 1 to 16 EN-41

Left-hand part channel PartL Ch 1 to 16

Music preset key change MP Key –5 to 6 EN-54

Audio In Center Cancel AIn CCan On, Off EN-13

Examination Mode ExamMode On, Off EN-118

Display contrast Contrast 1 to 17 EN-10

Auto Power Off AutoOff On, Off EN-9

Auto resume AtResume On, Off EN-10

Reset Reset –

EN-118Setting reset Setting –

Factory reset Factory –

Function

Name

Settings

CT-X5000 CT-X3000

Reverb 1 to 33 1 to 25

Chorus 1 to 17 1 to 13

Delay 1 to 21 1 to 16

Equalizer 1 to 11 1 to 10

Function Name Display Settings See Page

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 117 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

Configuring Function Settings

EN-118

The Examination Mode changes the operation of the Digital

Keyboard as described below to provide support for those

taking a musical instrument grade test.

●Accompaniment Pattern Operations

• If the Digital Keyboard is in synchro start standby (page

EN-48) while ACCOMP is off ([ACCOMP] indicator not

displayed), rhythm will start when you play something

anywhere on the keyboard. Synchro start standby is exited

at this time.

• Rhythm will not start even if you press bo INTRO, or

bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to bs VARIATION/FILL-IN

4 while rhythm play is stopped. Instead, each

accompaniment pattern becomes selected and the

corresponding indicators ([ I ], [V1] to [V4]) flash on the

display.

• Pressing bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to bs VARIATION/

FILL-IN 4 while an accompaniment pattern’s intro is

sounding immediately sounds a fill-in (1 to 4) and sounds

the variation that corresponds to the button that was

pressed.

• Pressing bp VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 to bs VARIATION/

FILL-IN 4 while variation 1 to 4 of an accompaniment

pattern is sounding immediately switches to the

accompaniment pattern, even part way through a measure.

• The registration function saves the accompaniment pattern

selection status.

●Split Point Settings

• The correspondence between note numbers and note

names is Note Number 60 = C3. (C4 when Examination

Mode is turned off.)

• For the split point, lower point, and chord point explained

under “Advanced Split Settings” (page EN-50), you press a

keyboard key to specify the upper limit of the LOWER part

keyboard (or accompaniment keyboard) in the Examination

Mode.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Other”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“ExamMode”.

Press bn [–] or [+] to turn on the setting.

When the setting is the way you want, long-

press the [4] (EXIT) bm number key to exit the

setting screen.

You can use the procedure below to return the data and

settings to their initial factory defaults.

• The procedure below deletes all of the following data

stored in Digital Keyboard memory: user tones, user

rhythms, registration data, MIDI recorder song data.

Backup of important data to a USB flash drive (page

EN-119) or computer (page EN-125) is recommended.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Other”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Reset”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Factory”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the factory reset

or bn [–] (NO) to cancel.

• To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT) bm

number key.

You can use bk FUNCTION to return all Digital Keyboard

settings to their initial factory defaults.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112), and perform

the following operation to select setting reset:

Other (Other) 3 Reset (Reset) 3 Setting reset (Setting)

(page EN-117). Next, execute the reset.

Examination Mode

To enter the Digital Keyboard’s Examination

mode

Batch Deleting Data from Digital

Keyboard Memory

To return all Digital Keyboard settings and

data to their initial factory defaults (Factory

Reset)

To return all Digital Keyboard settings to

their initial factory defaults (Setting Reset)

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 118 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-119

Your Digital Keyboard supports the use of a commercially

available USB flash drive to perform the operations below.

• Formatting the USB flash drive

• Saving user tones, user rhythms, and other data stored in

Digital Keyboard memory to a USB flash drive

• Importing user tones, user rhythms, and other data from a

USB flash drive to Digital Keyboard memory

• Playing back, on the Digital Keyboard, general song data

(MIDI file or WAV format audio file) copied to USB flash

drive using a computer

– For information about the procedure for copying song

data to a USB flash drive, see “Using a Computer to

Copy General Song Data to a USB Flash Drive” (page

EN-123).

– For information about playback procedures, see “Playing

Back a Song from a USB Flash Drive” (page EN-42) and

“Playing Back an Audio File on a USB Flash Drive (Audio

Mode)” (page EN-42).

• Be sure to observe the precautions provided in the

documentation that comes with the USB flash drive.

• Avoid using a USB flash drive under the following

conditions. Such conditions can corrupt data stored on

the USB flash drive.

• Areas subjected to high temperature, high humidity,

or corrosive gas

• Areas subjected to strong electrostatic charge and

digital noise

• Never remove the USB flash drive while data is being

written to or loaded from it. Doing so can corrupt the

data on the USB flash drive and damage the USB flash

drive port.

• Never insert anything besides a USB flash drive into

the USB flash drive port. Doing so creates the risk of

malfunction.

• A USB flash drive can become warm after very long

use. This is normal and does not indicate malfunction.

• Static electricity conducted to the USB flash drive port

from your hand or from a USB flash drive can cause

malfunction of the Digital Keyboard. If this happens,

turn the Digital Keyboard off and then back on again.

• Never plug any other device besides a USB flash drive

into the USB flash drive port.

• When you perform a USB flash drive operation or turn

on the Digital Keyboard while a USB flash drive is

plugged in, the Digital Keyboard initially needs to

perform a “mounting” sequence to prepare for data

exchange with the USB flash drive. Digital Keyboard

operations may be momentarily disabled while a

mounting sequence is being performed. The [USB]

indicator will flash on the display while the USB flash

drive is being mounted. It may take up to 10 or 20

seconds or even longer for a USB flash drive to be

mounted. Do not attempt to perform any operation on

the Digital Keyboard while a mounting sequence is in

progress. A USB flash drive needs to be mounted each

time it is connected to the Digital Keyboard.

USB Flash Drive

USB Flash Drive and USB Flash Drive Port

Handling Precautions

Copyrights

You are allowed to use recordings for your own

personal use. Any reproduction of an audio or music

format file, without the permission of its copyright

holder, is strictly prohibited under copyright laws

and international treaties. Also, making such files

available on the Internet or distributing them to third

parties, regardless of whether such activities are

conducted with or without compensation, is strictly

prohibited under copyright laws and international

treaties. CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be

held in any way liable for any use of this Digital

Keyboard that is illegal under copyright laws.

Connecting a USB Flash Drive to

and Detaching It from the Digital

Keyboard

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 119 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

USB Flash Drive

EN-120

As shown in the illustration below, insert the

USB flash drive into the Digital Keyboard’s

USB flash drive port.

• Carefully push the USB flash drive in as far as it will

go. Do not use undue force when inserting the USB

flash drive.

Check to confirm that there is no data

exchange operation being performed, and then

pull the USB flash drive straight out.

• Be sure to format a USB flash drive on the Digital

Keyboard before using it for the first time.

• Formatting a USB flash drive deletes all data currently

stored on it. Before formatting a USB flash drive, make

sure it does not have any valuable data stored on it.

• The format operation performed by this Digital

Keyboard is a “quick format”. If you want to completely

delete all of the data in USB flash drive, format it on

your computer or some other device.

This Digital Keyboard supports USB flash drives formatted to

FAT32. If your USB flash drive is formatted to a different file

system, use the Windows format function to reformat it to

FAT32. Do not use quick format.

Insert the USB flash drive to be formatted into

the Digital Keyboard’s USB flash drive port.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Media”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays the [USB] indicator.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Format”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

Press bn [+] (YES) to execute the format or bn

[–] (NO) to cancel.

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) starts formatting and displays

the message “Wait...” (operation in progress). Do not

perform any operation while this message is displayed.

“Complete” is displayed after the operation is

complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

This cause the [USB] indicator to disappear.

• Formatting a USB flash drive on the Digital Keyboard will

create a folder named MUSICDAT in its root directory. Use

this folder when exchanging data between the Digital

Keyboard and USB flash drive.

To connect a USB flash drive to the Digital

Keyboard

To remove a USB flash drive from the Digital

Keyboard

Formatting a USB Flash Drive

Supported USB Flash Drives

USB flash drive port

USB flash drive

To format a USB flash drive

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 120 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-121

USB Flash Drive

You can use Digital Keyboard operations to perform data

storage, data import, data delete, and data renaming

operations for a USB flash drive plugged into the Digital

Keyboard.

These operations can be performed on the data listed below.

• User tones created with the Digital Keyboard

• User rhythms created with the Digital Keyboard

• Songs recorded with the Digital Keyboard’s MIDI recorder

• Setup data registered with the Digital Keyboard’s

registration function

• User phrases recorded to Digital Keyboard phrase pads

■Sub Menu/File Name Extension List

The table below shows the sub-menus that are used for the

operations described in this section, and the file name

extensions for data types.

Insert the USB flash drive into the Digital

Keyboard’s USB flash drive port.

Press bk FUNCTION.

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Media”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display

“Save”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display a

sub-menu of options that correspond to the

type of data being saved.

• See “Sub Menu/File Name Extension List” (above).

Press [6] (ENTER).

• If “All Data” is selected in step 5, step 7 is not required.

Proceed to step 8.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

data to be saved, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Input the file name you want to use.

• See “Text Character Input” (page EN-15) for

information about how to enter text.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

• The message “Replace?” will appear if there is already

data with the same name on the USB flash drive. If this

happens, pressing bn [+] (YES) in step 10 below will

overwrite the existing data with the new data.

10.

Press bn [+] (YES) to save.

• To cancel the operation, press bn [–] (NO).

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays “Wait...” (operation in

progress). Do not perform any operation while this

message is displayed. “Complete” is displayed after

the operation is complete.

11.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

USB Flash Drive Operations

Data Type Sub Menu File Name

Extension

User Tones Tone TON

User Rhythms Rhythm AC7, CKF, Z00

User Recording MltRec

MltR SMF

MRF

MID (Save only)

Registration

(Bank unit)

RegMemBk RBK

User Phrases

(Phrase set unit)

Phrs Set PHS

All the above data All Data DAL

To save Digital Keyboard data to a USB flash

drive

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 121 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

USB Flash Drive

EN-122

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To save

Digital Keyboard data to a USB flash drive”

(page EN-121).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Load”, and then press [6] (ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display a

sub-menu of options that correspond to the

type of data being imported.

• See “Sub Menu/File Name Extension List” (page

EN-121).

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays a file name of data that can be imported.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

data you want to import into Digital Keyboard

memory.

• If “All Data” is selected in step 3, steps 6 and 7 below

are not required. Proceed to step 8.

• Pressing bk FUNCTION at this time will display the

file name extension of the currently selected data file.

(Note that this operation is possible only if the

[FUNCTION] indicator is flashing.) Press

bk FUNCTION again to return to the file name.

Press [6] (ENTER).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to specify the

number of the user area where imported data

should be stored.

• Pressing bn [–] and [+] at the same time displays the

lowest numbered empty user area. If there is no empty

user area, the lowest numbered area is displayed.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

• If you displayed “All Data” in step 3 of this procedure or

if the user area you specified in step 7 already

contains data, the message “Replace?” will appear. If

this happens, pressing bn [+] (YES) in step 9 below

will overwrite the existing data in the user area with the

imported data.

Press bn [+] (YES) to import.

• To cancel the operation, press bn [–] (NO).

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays “Wait...” (operation in

progress). Do not perform any operation while this

message is displayed. “Complete” is displayed after

the operation is complete.

10.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To save

Digital Keyboard data to a USB flash drive”

(page EN-121).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Delete”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display a

sub-menu of options that correspond to the

type of data being deleted.

• See “Sub Menu/File Name Extension List” (page

EN-121).

Press [6] (ENTER).

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

data to be deleted, and then press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

To delete the data, press bn [+] (YES).

• To cancel the operation, press bn [–] (NO).

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays “Wait...” (operation in

progress). Do not perform any operation while this

message is displayed. “Complete” is displayed after

the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

To load data from a USB flash drive to Digital

Keyboard memory

To delete USB flash drive data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 122 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-123

USB Flash Drive

Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 under “To save

Digital Keyboard data to a USB flash drive”

(page EN-121).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) bm number keys

to display “Rename”, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Use the [1] (V) and [3] (W) keys to display a

sub-menu of options that correspond to the

type of data being renamed.

• See “Sub Menu/File Name Extension List” (page

EN-121).

Press [6] (ENTER).

This enables specification of the data to be renamed.

Use bn [–] and [+] or the bl dial to select the

data to be renamed, and then press [6]

(ENTER).

Rename the file.

• See “Text Character Input” (page EN-15) for

information about how to enter text.

Press [6] (ENTER).

This displays “Sure?”

• The message “Replace?” will appear if there is already

data with the same name on the USB flash drive. If this

happens, pressing bn [+] (YES) in step 8 below will

overwrite the existing data with the new data.

To change the name, press bn [+] (YES).

• To cancel the operation, press bn [–] (NO).

• Pressing bn [+] (YES) displays “Wait...” (operation in

progress). Do not perform any operation while this

message is displayed. “Complete” is displayed after

the operation is complete.

To exit the operation, long-press the [4] (EXIT)

bm number key.

You can use the same operations as those for built-in songs

to play back files of the formats below, which are stored in the

MUSICDAT folder.

• Standard MIDI files (SMF format 0/1) or CASIO MIDI files

(CMF format)

• WAV format audio files (16 bit, 44.1 kHz)

Connect the USB flash drive to your computer.

Create a folder named MUSICDAT in the root

directory of the USB flash drive.

• This step is not required is there is already a

MUSICDAT folder in the USB flash drive’s root

directory.

Copy song data you want to play back on the

Digital Keyboard to the MUSICDAT folder.

• For information about playback procedures, see

“Playing Back a Song from a USB Flash Drive” (page

EN-42) and “Playing Back an Audio File on a USB

Flash Drive (Audio Mode)” (page EN-42).

To rename USB flash drive data Using a Computer to Copy

General Song Data to a USB Flash

Drive

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 123 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-124

You can connect the Digital Keyboard to a computer and

exchange MIDI data between them. You can send play data

from the Digital Keyboard to music software running on your

computer, or you can send MIDI data from your computer to

the Digital Keyboard for playback.

The following shows the minimum computer system

requirements for sending and receiving MIDI data. Check to

make sure that your computer complies with these

requirements before connecting the Digital Keyboard to it.

●Operating System

Windows Vista *1

Windows 7 *2

Windows 8.1 *3

Windows 10 *4

macOS (OS X/Mac OS X) 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10, 10.11,

10.12

*1 Windows Vista (32-bit)

*2 Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)

*3 Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)

*4 Windows 10 (32-bit, 64-bit)

●USB port

• Never connect to a computer that does not conform to

the above requirements. Doing so can cause problems

with your computer.

• For the latest news about supported operating systems,

visit the website at the URL below.

http://world.casio.com/

• Make sure you follow the steps of the procedure below

exactly. Connecting incorrectly can make data send

and receive impossible.

Turn off the Digital Keyboard and then start up

your computer.

• Do not start up the music software on your computer

yet!

After starting up your computer, use a

commercially available USB cable to connect it

to the Digital Keyboard.

• Use a USB 2.0 or 1.1 A-B connector type USB cable.

Turn on the Digital Keyboard.

• If this is the first time you are connecting the Digital

Keyboard to your computer, the driver software

required to send and receive data will be installed on

your computer automatically.

Start up commercially available music software

on your computer.

Configure the music software settings to select

“CASIO USB-MIDI” as the MIDI device.

• For information about how to select the MIDI device,

see the user documentation that comes with the music

software you are using.

• Be sure to turn on the Digital Keyboard first before

starting up your computer’s music software.

• USB send and receive is disabled during playback of a

Song Bank song (page EN-39).

Connecting a Computer

Minimum Computer System Requirements

Connecting the Digital Keyboard to Your

Computer

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 124 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-125

Connecting a Computer

This parameter specifies the channel to be used when

keyboard performance information is sent from this Digital

Keyboard to a computer.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Keyboard Channel (Keybd Ch) (page

EN-117).

This parameter can be used when using an external sound

source to play Digital Keyboard notes to specify that the notes

should not be sounded by the Digital Keyboard.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Local Control (Local) (page EN-117).

This parameter specifies whether or not Auto Accompaniment

data should be sent.

Perform the procedure under “To configure function settings

with the bk FUNCTION button” (page EN-112) and configure

the following setting: Accomp Out (AcompOut) (page

EN-117).

You can transfer recorded songs, and other data in Digital

Keyboard memory to a computer for storage. You also can

load Auto Accompaniment data you download from the

CASIO website to the Digital Keyboard, which greatly

expands Auto Accompaniment patterns available to you. A

special Data Manager application is required in order to

transfer data to and from the Digital Keyboard.

You can transfer the types of data listed below between the

Digital Keyboard and a computer.

• User tone data (page EN-71)

• User rhythm data (page EN-76)

• User-recorded songs (page EN-90)

• Registration (bank unit) (page EN-67)

• User Phrase (phrase set unit) (page EN-54)

Go to the CASIO WORLDWIDE site at the

following URL.

http://world.casio.com/

At the site, select a geographic area or country.

After accessing the area site, navigate to the

minimum computer system requirements for

Data Manager for this product.

• You should be able to find a link to Data Manager

information on the product introduction page of this

product. If you cannot find such a link, use the search

form of the area site where you are located to enter the

model name of this product and search for it.

• Note that site contents are subject to change without

notice.

Check if your computer system complies with

the minimum requirements for Data Manager.

Download Data Manager and its user’s guide to

your computer.

Follow the procedure in the user’s guide that

you downloaded in step 5 to install and use

Data Manager.

• You can download accompaniment data from the

Internet Data Expansion system of the CASIO MUSIC

SITE (http://music.casio.com/) and load it into the

memory of this Digital Keyboard. Note that there is not

any accompaniment data intended specifically for this

model, so you should use data for other models.

• Since the accompaniment data is for other models, you

may experience some abnormalities when playing it on this

model.

• For information about accompaniment data compatibility

between models, see the Data Manager user’s guide you

download in step 5 of the above procedure.

MIDI Settings

Keyboard Channel

Local Control

Accomp Out

Transferring Data Between the

Digital Keyboard and a Computer

Data Types Supported for Data Transfer

Downloading Data Manager

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 125 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-126

Reference

Troubleshooting

Symptom Action

Included Accessories

I can’t find something that should be here. Carefully check inside all of the packing materials.

Power Requirements

Power will not turned on. • Check the AC adaptor (page EN-8).

• CT-X3000: Make sure that the batteries are facing correctly (page

EN-9). Replace the batteries with new ones (page EN-9) or switch

over to AC adaptor power (page EN-8).

The display lights up momentarily but power does

not turn on when I press the 1P (power) button.

Press 1P (power) firmly and completely to turn on power.

The Digital Keyboard outputs a loud sound and then

suddenly powers down.

CT-X3000: Replace the batteries with new ones (page EN-9) or

switch over to AC adaptor power (page EN-8).

The Digital Keyboard suddenly powers down after

about 30 minutes.

This happens when Auto Power Off (page EN-9) is triggered.

Display

The display keeps going out or are flashing. CT-X3000: Replace the batteries with new ones (page EN-9) or

switch over to AC adaptor power (page EN-8).

Screen contents are visible only from straight ahead. This is dues to production limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.

Sound

Nothing happens when I press any keyboard key. • Adjust the volume setting (page EN-11).

• Check if something is plugged into fk on the back of the Digital

Keyboard.

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all keyboard settings

(page EN-9).

Nothing happens or notes do not play normally when

I play notes on the left side of the keyboard.

Press cm to disable chord input in the accompaniment keyboard area

(page EN-44).

Nothing happens when I start an Auto

Accompaniment.

• With rhythms 226 to 235, nothing will sound until you play a chord

on the keyboard. Try playing a chord (page EN-48).

• Check and adjust the accompaniment volume setting (page

EN-45).

• If there is no user rhythm stored in memory, Auto Accompaniment

will not start when you press ck while a rhythm in the range of 294

to 393 (CT-X5000) / 294 to 343 (CT-X3000) is selected (page

EN-76).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

Nothing happens when I start playback of a built-in

song.

• It takes a little time after you press the button until the song starts to

play. Wait for a moment for the song to start.

• Check and adjust the song volume (page EN-40).

• With song numbers 31 through 40, pressing ck will not start the

song if there is no MIDI recorder data stored to the song (page

EN-90).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

The metronome does not sound. • Check and adjust the metronome volume setting (page EN-27).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

Notes keep sounding, without stopping. • Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

• Change the Sustain setting (page EN-32).

• CT-X3000: Replace the batteries with new ones (page EN-9) or

switch over to AC adaptor power (page EN-8).

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 126 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-127

Reference

Some notes are cut off while they are playing. Notes are cut off whenever the number of notes being sounded

exceeds the maximum polyphony value of 64 (32 for some tones).

This does not indicate malfunction.

The volume or tone setting I made has changed. • Adjust the volume setting (page EN-11) and the equalizer setting

(page EN-25).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

• CT-X3000: Replace the batteries with new ones (page EN-9) or

switch over to AC adaptor power (page EN-8).

Output volume does not change even though I

change my keyboard touch.

• Change the Touch Response setting (page EN-29).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

In certain keyboard ranges, the volume and tone

quality sound are slightly different from those in other

keyboard ranges.

This is due to system limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.

With some tones, octaves do not change at the far

ends of the keyboard.

This is due to system limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.

The pitch of the notes does not match other

accompanying instruments or sounds strange when

played long with other instruments.

• Check and adjust the transpose (page EN-35), tuning (page

EN-37), part coarse tuning and part fine tuning settings (page

EN-37).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

The reverb of notes seems to change suddenly. • Check and adjust the reverb and delay settings (page EN-22).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard

settings (page EN-9).

Operation

Tone, rhythm, and other settings revert to their initial

defaults whenever you turn on the Digital Keyboard.

Though Digital Keyboard settings reset when you turn off the Digital

Keyboard (page EN-9), you can save setups to registration memory

for instant recall whenever you need them (page EN-67). If Auto

Resume function (page EN-10) is turned on, most settings are saved

while power is turned off.

Computer Connection

I can’t exchange data between the Digital Keyboard

and a computer.

• Check to make sure that the USB cable is connected to the Digital

Keyboard and computer, and that the device is selected correctly

with your computer’s music software settings (page EN-124).

• Turn off the Digital Keyboard and then exit the music software on

your computer. Next, turn the Digital Keyboard back on and then

restart the music software on your computer.

Symptom Action

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 127 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-128

Reference

Error Messages

Display Cause Action

Err Limit You are attempting to record more than 999

measures.

Make your recordings up to 999 measures long.

Err Mem Full You are attempting a recording that exceeds the

allowable per-song limit.

Keep song recordings with the allowable per-song

limit.

You are attempting a recording that exceeds the

allowable per-phrase limit.

Keep phrase recordings with the allowable per- phrase

limit.

You are attempting a recording that exceeds the

allowable per-user-rhythm limit.

Keep user rhythm recordings with the allowable per-

user-rhythm limit.

Err DataFull You are attempting to record more than 10 songs. Delete some of the songs in memory.

You are attempting to store user tones that cause the

maximum allowable limit to be exceeded.

Delete unneeded user tones.

You are attempting to store user rhythms that cause

the maximum allowable limit to be exceeded.

Delete unneeded user rhythms.

Err No Media The USB flash drive is not plugged correctly into the

USB flash drive port.

Correctly plug the USB flash drive into the USB flash

drive port.

The USB flash drive was removed while some

operation was in progress.

Do not remove the USB flash drive while any operation

is in progress.

The USB flash drive is write-protected. Write-enable the USB flash drive.

The USB flash drive is protected by anti-virus

software.

Use a USB flash drive that is not protected by anti-

virus software.

Err No File There is no loadable or playable file in the MUSICDAT

folder.

Move the file you want to load into the “MUSICDAT”

folder or the file you want to play into the “MUSICDAT”

folder (page EN-123).

Err No Data You are selecting a user data item that does not have

any data stored to it.

Select a user data item that has data stored to it.

Err ReadOnly A read-only file with the same name you are trying to

use is already stored on USB flash drive.

• Change the name and then save the new data.

• Remove the read-only attribute from the existing

USB flash drive file and overwrite it with the new

data.

• Use a different USB flash drive.

Err MediaFul There is not enough space available on the USB flash

drive.

Delete some of the files on the USB flash drive to

make room for new data or use a different USB flash

drive.

Err ManyFile There are too many files on the USB flash drive. Delete some of the files on the USB flash drive to

make room for new data.

Err NotSMF01 You are attempting to play back SMF Format 2 song

data.

Playback of SMF Format 0 or Format 1 only is

supported.

Err Large Sz The SMF file on the USB flash drive cannot be played

because it is too big

Playback of SMF files up to approximately 320 KB in

size is supported.

The data you are trying to import cannot be imported

because it is too big.

The maximum data size (per data item) when loading

data into Digital Keyboard memory is shown below.

Rhythms: Approximately 64 KB

Phrases: Approximately 8 KB

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 128 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-129

Reference

Err WrongDat The USB flash drive data is corrupted. –

USB flash drive contains data that is not supported by

this Digital Keyboard.

–

Err Format The USB flash drive format is not compatible with this

Digital Keyboard.

• Use a computer or other device to change the USB

flash drive format to something that is compatible

with the Digital Keyboard (page EN-120).

• Use a different USB flash drive.

USB flash drive memory is corrupted. Use a different USB flash drive.

Display Cause Action

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 129 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-130

Reference

Specifications

Model CT-X5000 CT-X3000

Keyboard 61 standard size keys

Touch Response Sensitivity: 3 types, Off

Maximum Polyphony 64 notes (32 for certain tones)

Tones

Preset Tones 800

User Tones 100 (See “Tone Editing” item of these specifications.)

Other Layer, split (configurable split point, lower point, chord point settings)

System Effects

Reverb 32 types, Off 24 types, Off

Chorus 16 types, Tones 12 types, Tones

Delay 20 types, Tones 15 types, Tones

DSP 100 types*1, DSP tones 100 types*1, DSP tones

Master Effects Equalizer (10 presets)

4-band User Equalizer

Equalizer (10 presets)

External Input Effects Center cancel (vocal cut) for input from the Audio In jack

Metronome

Beat 0 (accented tone off), 1 to 16

Tempo Tempo value: 20 to 255

Demo Songs 3

Song Bank

Built-in Songs 30

User-recorded Songs 10 (See the “MIDI Recorder” item of these specifications.)

USB Memory Songs Playback of standard MIDI files (SMF format 0/1), CASIO MIDI files (CMF format) on a

USB flash drive is supported.

USB Audio Playback Playback of audio files on a USB flash drive is supported.

Supported File Formats WAV format, 44.1 kHz 16 bit

Other Functions Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)

Auto Accompaniment

Built-in Rhythms 235 235

User Rhythms 100 (See the “Rhythm Editing” item of

these specifications.)

50 (See the “Rhythm Editing” item of these

specifications.)

One Touch Presets 235 235

Music Presets 310 (With chord progressions)

Phrase Pads

Number of Pads 4

User Phrases 100 (4 phrases × 25 pads)

Memory Capacity Approximately 1,000 notes (per phrase)

Editing Mode Copy, delete, phrase editing

Mixer function

Affected Parts Sound source parts, microphone input part

Parameters Part on/off, volume, pan, reverb send, chorus send, delay send

Registration Maximum 128 setups (8 setups × 16 banks), registration sequence

Tone Editing Preset tone editing, DSP editing

Memory for storage of edited tones (up to 100)

Rhythm Editing New rhythm creation, rhythm editing

Memory for storage of created/edited rhythms (CT-X5000: Up to 100, CT-X3000: Up to

50)

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 130 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-131

Reference

*1 Can be applied to user tones using DSP editing (page EN-72).

• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

MIDI Recorder Real-time recording, playback

Keyboard Performance Recording 10 songs, 17 tracks (1 system track, 16 solo tracks)

Memory Capacity Approximately 40,000 notes (per song)

Editing Mode Song editing, track editing, event editing, step input

Other Functions Overdubbing, punch-in recording

Pedals Sustain, sostenuto, soft, rhythm/song, expression

Controllers Pitch bend wheel, SUSTAIN button,

PORTAMENTO button, MODULATION/

ASSIGNABLE button

Pitch bend wheel, SUSTAIN button,

PORTAMENTO button

Other Functions

Transpose ±1 octaves (–12 to 0 to +12 semitones)

Octave Shift Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower 1/Lower 2, ±3 octaves

Tuning A4 = 415.5 to 465.9 Hz (Initial Default: 440.0 Hz)

Part coarse tune For each keyboard part, ±2 octaves (–24 to 0 to +24 semitones)

Part fine tune For each keyboard part, ±99 cents

Scales 17 preset scales, scale fine tuning

Auto Harmonize 12 types

Arpeggiator 150 types

MIDI 16ch multi-timbre received, GM Level 1 standard

Inputs/Outputs

USB Flash Drive Port Type A

USB Port Type B

Pedal 1 Jack Standard jack (6.3 mm)

Pedal 2, Expression Jack Standard jack (6.3 mm)

Headphones Jack Stereo standard jack (6.3 mm)

Audio Input Jack Stereo mini jack (3.5 mm)

Input impedance: 9 kΩ; Input sensitivity; 200 mV

Line Out Jack (CT-X5000) Standard jacks (6.3 mm) × 2

Output impedance: 2.3 kΩ; Output voltage: 1.9 V (RMS) MAX

Microphone Input Jack (CT-X5000) Standard jack (6.3 mm) (Connect a dynamic microphone.)

Input impedance: 3 kΩ; Input sensitivity; 10 mV

Power Jack DC 24V DC 12V

Power Supply AC adaptor only 2-way

AC Adaptor AD-E24250LW AD-A12150LW

Batteries – 6 D-size alkaline batteries

Battery Life – Approximately 10 hours continuous

operation on alkaline batteries

Auto Power Off Approximately 30 minutes after last

operation; Can be disabled.

Approximately 30 minutes after last

operation; Can be disabled.

Speakers 10cm× 2 (Output: 15W + 15W) 10cm× 2 (Output: 6W + 6W)

Power Consumption 24V = 15 W 12V = 8 W

Dimensions 94.8 × 38.4 × 11.6 cm (37 5/16 × 15 1/8 × 4 9/16 inch)

Weight Approximately 7.0 kg (15.4 lbs) Approximately 6.9 kg (15.2 lbs) (without

batteries)

Model CT-X5000 CT-X3000

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 131 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-132

Reference

DSP Effect List

DSP Module List

Module

Number Module Name Display Description

Mono 1-Band EQ Mono 1EQ This is a single-band monaural equalizer.

Mono 2-Band EQ Mono 2EQ This is a dual-band monaural equalizer.

Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3EQ This is a three-band monaural equalizer.

Stereo 1-Band EQ Streo1EQ This is a single-band stereo equalizer.

Stereo 2-Band EQ Streo2EQ This is a dual-band stereo equalizer.

Stereo 3-Band EQ Streo3EQ This is a three-band stereo equalizer.

Tone Control ToneCtrl Provides monaural tone control for adjusting low-range, mid-range, and

high-range frequencies.

Tremolo Tremolo Shifts the volume of the input signal using an LFO.

Auto Pan Auto Pan Shifts the continual left-right panning of the input signal using an LFO.

 Compressor Compress Compresses the input signal, which can have the effect of suppressing level

variation.

- Limiter Limiter Limits the input signal level so it does not rise above a preset level.

 Enhancer Enhancer Enhances the profiles of the low range and high range of the input signal.

 Phaser Phaser Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by using an LFO to change

the phase of the input signal and then mixes it with the original input signal.

 Chorus Chorus Gives notes depth and breadth.

 Flanger Flanger Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to notes. Selects the LFO

waveform.

 Rotary Rotary This effect is a rotary speaker simulator.

 Drive Rotary DriveRot This is a rotary speaker simulator that makes overdrive possible.

 Pitch Shifter Pitch This effect transforms the pitch of the input signal.

 Ring Modulator Ring Mod Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator signal to create a metallic

sound.

 Reflection Reflect Simulates the initial reflection of reverberation. Applies acoustic ambiance

and presence to notes.

- Delay Delay Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a repeating effect.

 Piano Effect Piano This effect is suited to acoustic piano play.

 LFO Wah LFO Wah This is a “wah” effect that can automatically affect the frequency using an

LFO.

 Auto Wah Auto Wah This is a “wah” effect that can automatically shift the frequency in

accordance with the level of the input signal.

 Modeling Wah ModelWah Simulates various types of wah pedals. This effect can automatically shift

the frequency in accordance with the level of the input signal.

 Distortion Distort Distortion, wah, and amp simulator combined into a single effect.

 Drive Drive Simulates the drive of a musical instrument amplifier.

 Amp Cab Amp Cab Simulates the amp and speaker cabinet without drive and distortion.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 132 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-133

Reference

DSP Parameter List

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

 Mono 1-Band EQ This is a single-band monaural equalizer.

EQ Freq EQ Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer. *1

EQ Gain EQ Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Mono 2-Band EQ This is a dual-band monaural equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1. *1

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 to 00 to 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2. *1

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Mono 3-Band EQ This is a three-band monaural equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1. *1

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 to 00 to 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2. *1

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 to 00 to 12

EQ3 Freq EQ3 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 3. *1

EQ3 Gain EQ3 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 3. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Stereo 1-Band EQ This is a single-band stereo equalizer.

EQ Freq EQ Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer. *1

EQ Gain EQ Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 133 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-134

Reference

 Stereo 2-Band EQ This is a dual-band stereo equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1. *1

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 to 00 to 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2. *1

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Stereo 3-Band EQ This is a three-band stereo equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1. *1

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 to 00 to 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2. *1

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 to 00 to 12

EQ3 Freq EQ3 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 3. *1

EQ3 Gain EQ3 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 3. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Tone Control Provides monaural tone control for adjusting low-range, mid-range, and high-range

frequencies.

Low Freq Low Frequency Adjusts the cutoff frequency of Low-range *2

Low Gain Low Gain Adjusts the Low-range gain. –12 to 00 to 12

Mid Freq Mid Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Mid-range. *1

Mid Gain Mid Gain Adjusts the Mid-range gain. –12 to 00 to 12

HighFreq High Frequency Adjusts the cutoff frequency of High-range *3

HighGain High Gain Adjusts the High-range gain. –12 to 00 to 12

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 134 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-135

Reference

 Tremolo Shifts the volume of the input signal using an LFO.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Trapzoid

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Auto Pan Shifts the continual left-right panning of the input signal using an LFO.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Trapzoid

Manual Manual Adjusts the pan (stereo position). –64 is full left, 0 is center, and

+63 is full right.

–64 to 00 to 63

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Compressor Compresses the input signal, which can have the effect of suppressing level variation.

Attack Attack Adjusts the time until compression goes into effect. A smaller

value causes prompt compressor operation, which suppresses

the attack of the input signal. A larger values delays compressor

operation, which causes the attack of the input signal to be

output as-is.

000 to 127

Release Release Adjusts the time until compression is released after the input

signal drops below a prescribed level. When an attack feeling is

desired (no compression at the onset of the sound), set this

parameter to as low a value as possible. To have compression

applied at all times, set a high value.

000 to 127

Ratio Ratio Adjusts the compression ratio of the audio signal. 1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 8:1,

16:1, 32:1, Inf:1

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. Output volume changes in

accordance with the Ratio setting and the characteristics of the

input tone.

000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 135 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-136

Reference

- Limiter Limits the input signal level so it does not rise above a preset level.

Limit Limit Adjusts the volume level of the limit at which limiting is applied. 000 to 127

Attack Attack Adjusts the time until the compression effect starts. A smaller

value causes prompt limiter operation, which suppresses the

attack of the input signal. A larger values delays limiter operation,

which causes the attack of the input signal to be output as-is.

000 to 127

Release Release Adjusts the time until compression is released after the input

signal drops below a prescribed level.

000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. Output volume changes in

accordance with the Limit setting and the characteristics of the

input tone. Use this parameter to correct for such changes.

000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Enhancer Enhances the profiles of the low range and high range of the input signal.

Low Freq Low Frequency Adjusts the low range enhancer frequency. 000 to 127

Low Gain Low Gain Adjusts the low range enhancer gain. 000 to 127

HighFreq High Frequency Adjusts the high range enhancer frequency. 000 to 127

HighGain High Gain Adjusts the high range enhancer gain. 000 to 127

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Phaser Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by using an LFO to change the phase of

the input signal and then mixes it with the original input signal.

Resonanc Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback 000 to 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the reference phaser shift amount. –64 to 00 to 63

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Random

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 136 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-137

Reference

 Chorus Gives notes depth and breadth.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the strength of feedback –64 to 00 to 63

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

Polarity Polarity Inverts the LFO of one channel. Negative, Positive

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Flanger Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to notes. Selects the LFO waveform.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Random

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the strength of feedback –64 to 00 to 63

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Rotary This effect is a rotary speaker simulator.

Type Type Selects the rotary speaker type. 0 to 3

Speed Speed Switches the speed mode between fast and slow. Slow, Fast

Brake Brake Stops speaker rotation. Rotate, Stop

FallAcel Fall Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched from fast

to slow.

000 to 127

RiseAcel Rise Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched from slow

to fast.

000 to 127

SlowRate Slow Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the slow speed mode. 000 to 127

FastRate Fast Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the fast speed mode. 000 to 127

Vib/Cho Vibrato/Chorus Selects the vibrato and the chorus type. Off, Vibrato1,

Chorus 1, Vibrato2,

Chorus 2, Vibrato3,

Chorus 3

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 137 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-138

Reference

 Drive Rotary This is a rotary speaker simulator that makes overdrive possible.

Type Type Selects the rotary speaker type. 0 to 3

OD Gain Overdrive Gain Adjusts overdrive gain. 000 to 127

OD Level Overdrive Level Adjusts the overdrive output level. 000 to 127

Speed Speed Switches the speed mode between fast and slow. Slow, Fast

Brake Brake Stops speaker rotation. Rotate, Stop

FallAcel Fall Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched from fast

to slow.

000 to 127

RiseAcel Rise Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched from slow

to fast.

000 to 127

SlowRate Slow Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the slow speed mode. 000 to 127

FastRate Fast Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the fast speed mode. 000 to 127

Vib/Cho Vibrato/Chorus Selects the vibrato and the chorus type. Off, Vibrato1,

Chorus 1, Vibrato2,

Chorus 2, Vibrato3,

Chorus 3

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Pitch Shifter This effect transforms the pitch of the input signal.

Pitch Pitch Adjusts the pitch shift amount in quarter tone steps. –24 to 00 to 24

HighDamp High Damp Adjusts the high-range damp. A smaller number increases

damping.

000 to 127

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the feedback amount. 000 to 127

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Fine Fine Adjusts the pitch shift amount. –50 is a quarter note decrease,

while +50 is a quarter note increase.

–50 to 00 to 50

 Ring Modulator Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator signal to create a metallic sound.

OSC Freq OSC Frequency Sets the reference frequency of the internal oscillator. 000 to 127

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Tone Tone Adjusts the timbre of the ring modulator input sound. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 138 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-139

Reference

 Reflection Simulates the initial reflection of reverberation. Applies acoustic presence to notes.

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the repeat of the reflected sound. 000 to 127

Tone Tone Adjusts the tone of the reflected sound. 000 to 127

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

- Delay Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a repeating effect.

Time Delay Time Adjusts the total delay time in 1 ms units. 0001 to 1099

TmRatioL Delay Ratio L Adjusts the ratio of the left channel relative to the total delay time. 000 to 127

TmRatioR Delay Ratio R Adjusts the ratio of the right channel relative to the total delay

time.

000 to 127

Level L Delay Level L Adjusts the level of the left channel. 000 to 127

Level R Delay Level R Adjusts the level of the right channel. 000 to 127

FdbkType Feedback Type Selects the feedback type.

Stereo: Stereo feedback

Cross: Cross feedback

Stereo, Cross

Fdbk Lvl Feedback Adjusts the feedback amount. 000 to 127

Hi Damp High Damp Adjusts the high-range damp. A smaller number increases

damping.

000 to 127

TmpoSync Delay Tempo

Sync

Specifies how the actual total delay time is synced with tempo.

Off: Uses Delay Time value.

1/4 to 1: Uses value in accordance with number of beats.

Off, 1/4, 1/3, 3/8, 1/2,

2/3, 3/4, 1

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

 Piano Effect This effect is suited to acoustic piano play.

Lid Type Lid Type Adjusts how sound resonates in accordance with the opening

state of a piano lid.

Closed, SemiOpen,

FullOpen

RefLevel Reflection Level Adjusts the level of the initial reflection. 000 to 127

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 139 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-140

Reference

 LFO Wah This is a “wah” effect that can automatically affect the frequency using an LFO.

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. The input signal can become distorted

when the level of the sound being input, the number of chords, or

the Resonance value is large. Adjust this parameter to eliminate

such distortion.

000 to 127

Resonanc Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback 000 to 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 to 127

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 to 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 to 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Random

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Auto Wah This is a “wah” effect that can automatically shift the frequency in accordance with the

level of the input signal.

In Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. The input signal can become distorted

when the level of the sound being input, the number of chords, or

the Resonance value is large. Adjust this parameter to eliminate

such distortion.

000 to 127

Resonanc Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback 000 to 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 to 127

Depth Depth Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance with the level of the

input signal. Setting a positive value causes the wah filter to open

in direct proportion with the size of the input signal, producing a

bright sound. Setting a negative value causes the wah filter to

close in direct proportion with the size of the input signal,

producing a dark sound.

–64 to 00 to 63

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 140 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-141

Reference

 Modeling Wah Simulates various types of wah pedals. This effect can automatically shift the frequency

in accordance with the level of the input signal.

OutLevel Level Adjusts the wah level. 000 to 127

Type Type Selects the wah type. 1 to 8

Manual Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 to 127

Depth Depth Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance with the level of the

input signal. Setting a positive value causes the wah filter to open

in direct proportion with the size of the input signal, producing a

bright sound. Setting a negative value causes the wah filter to

close in direct proportion with the size of the input signal,

producing a dark sound.

–64 to 00 to 63

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Distortion Distortion, wah, and amp simulator combined into a single effect.

DistGain Dist Gain Adjusts the distortion input signal gain. 000 to 127

Dist Lvl Dist Level Adjusts the distortion output level. 000 to 127

Dist Low Dist Low Adjusts the distortion low-range gain. 000 to 127

DistHigh Dist High Adjusts the distortion high-range gain. 000 to 127

Wah Type Wah Type Specifies the wah type. 1 to 6

WahDepth Wah Depth Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance with the level of the

input signal.

–64 to 00 to 63

Wah Manu Wah Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 to 127

Routing Routing Specifies the distortion and wah connection. Dist, Wah, Wah-Dist,

Dist-Wah

Amp Amp Specifies the amp type. 0 to 16

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

1 CAE 3 IBZ 5 FAT 7 7STR

2 CRY 4 VO 6 LIGHT 8 RESO

1 LPF 3 V-Wah 5 L-Wah

2 C-Wah 4 F-Wah 6 H-Wah

0 Bypass 5 FD-DXRV 10 FD-TWRV2 15 FD-BMAN

1 FD-PRNST 6 VX-AC3 11 SL-SLO 16 BASS-STK

2 FD-TWRV1 7 ML-DC3 12 MB-RCTF

3 RL-J12 8 MB-MK1 13 PV-51-SK

4 FD-TWD 9 MS-STK 14 BASS-CMB

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 141 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-142

Reference

*1 100Hz, 125Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz, 800Hz, 1.0kHz, 1.3kHz, 1.6kHz, 2.0kHz, 2.5kHz, 3.2kHz,

4.0kHz, 5.0kHz, 6.3kHz, 8.0kHz

*2 50Hz, 63Hz, 80Hz, 100Hz, 125Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz, 800Hz

*3 2.0kHz, 2.5kHz, 3.2kHz, 4.0kHz, 5.0kHz, 6.0kHz, 8.0kHz, 10kHz, 13kHz, 16kHz

 Drive Simulates the drive of a musical instrument amplifier.

Type Drive Type Selects the drive type.*41 to 20

Gain Gain Adjusts the driver input signal gain. 000 to 127

OutLevel Level Adjusts the drive output level. 000 to 127

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

 Amp Cab Simulates the amp and speaker cabinet without drive and distortion.

Type Type Selects the amp cabinet type.*51 to 92

Vari Variation Selects a variation that changes the setup of the currently

selected amp. The number of variations*5 depends on the amp

type.

1 to 4

WetLevel Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 to 127

DryLevel Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 to 127

Settings Drive Type Display Description

1 to 4 Clean1 to 4 Clean1 to 4 Simulates a clean sound with little distortion.

5 to 8 Crunch1 to 4 Crunch1 to 4 Simulates a crisp crunch sound with little distortion.

9 to 12 Overdrive1 to 4 Overdrv1 to 4 Simulates an overdrive sound with mellow distortion.

13 to 16 Distortion1 to 4 Distort1 to 4 Simulates a hard, straight distortion sound.

17 to 20 Metal1 to 4 Metal1 to 4 Simulates an extreme and weighty distortion sound that is suitable for

heavy metal music.

Module Name Description Settings

Display Parameter Data

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 142 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-143

Reference

*5 (V: Number of variations)

Settings VDisplay

11FD-PRNST

21FD-TWRV1

31RL-J12

41FD-TWD

51FD-DXRV

6 1 VX-AC3

7 1 ML-DC3

81MB-MK1

91MS-STK

10 1 FD-TWRV2

11 1 SL-SLO

12 1 MB-RCTF

13 1 PV-51-SK

14 1 BASS-CMB

15 1 FD-BMAN

16 1 BASS-STK

17 3 65-MQ

18 3 AD-MP+CA

19 2 BC-HC30

20 3 BN-SHV

21 3 BN-ECS

22 3 BN-UBR

23 3 CV-LG3

24 2 DR-MZ38

25 2 DZ-V4

26 2 DZ-HA

27 4 EG-TWK

28 3 EG-VEN

29 2 EN-G15

30 1 EN-INV

31 1 EN-BM

32 2 EN-53+DI

33 4 EV-51III

34 3 FD-CHMP

35 3 FD-TWN

36 3 FD-TWRV3

37 2 FU-OD

38 2 GB-LANC

39 3 HK-TM18

40 3 HK-SBL

41 2 KH-STDT

42 3 KR-RV

43 4 LY-IRST

44 3 MB-MK3

45 3 MB-F3+DI

46 1 MB-D5

47 4 MB-DRCT

48 1 MB-TX+.5

Settings VDisplay

49 4 MB-TX+DI

50 4 MS-VS80

51 4 MS-J800

52 2 MS-J2401

53 3 MS-J2000

54 2 MS-J2+MB

55 3 MS-PLX

56 2 MS-J1+DI

57 4 MT-CFT

58 4 OR-O15

59 2 PN-P7

60 3 PR-SE3

61 4 PV-51II

62 4 PV-65MH

63 3 RA-NBK

64 2 RL-J20

65 2 RL-J120

66 2 RV-30

67 4 SA-PS1

68 2 SL-X8

69 2 SL-X9

70 3 SP-1624

71 3 SP-1695

72 3 SU-BGR3

Settings VDisplay

73 2 VH-SP6

74 3 VX-A15

75 2 VX-A15TB

76 3 VX-A30

77 3 VX-A30TB

78 4 YM-DG8

79 2 AC-360

80 2 AP-SV4DI

81 2 EB-C450

82 2 FD-BMNtw

83 2 FD-BMNsv

84 2 FD-BMNbk

85 2 FD-STBAS

86 3 GK-150

87 3 MK-T501

88 3 SW-PB20

89 3 SW-SM50

90 1 RL-CBKB

91 1 LY-3C-AC

92 4 AC-SIM

Settings VDisplay

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 143 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-144

Reference

The sound source of the Digital Keyboard is divided among four part groups: KEYBOARD, RHYTHM, SONG SYSTEM, SONG

SOLO. The roles assigned to each part of the part groups are a shown in the “Part” column of the table below.

■Sounding of the Digital Keyboard Sound Source by Digital Keyboard Operations or by MIDI IN Input

• Sounds generated during a performance on the keyboard are assigned to parts 1 through 5 of the KEYBOARD part group.

Phrase pads are assigned to parts 6 through 9 of the KEYBOARD part group.

• Sounds generated by Auto Accompaniment are assigned to the parts of the RHYTHM part group.

• Sounds generated by the system track and phrase pads during song playback (Song Bank Mode) are assigned to the parts of

the SONG SYSTEM part group.

• Sounds generated by the solo tracks sounded during song playback (Song Bank Mode) and sounds generated by messages

input from MIDI IN are assigned to the parts of the SONG SOLO part group.

Digital Keyboard Sound Source Configuration and MIDI Channel

Assignment

Part Group Part

Number Part MIDI OUT

Channel*1

…

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Off

KEYBOARD

n1 reppU draobyeK1

1 + n2 reppU draobyeK2

2 + n1 rewoL draobyeK3

3 + n2 rewoL draobyeK4

4 + nezinomraH otuA5

6 Phrase PAD 1

7 Phrase PAD 2

8 Phrase PAD 3

9 Phrase PAD 4

RHYTHM

9noissucreP pmoccA1

01murD pmoccA2

11ssaB pmoccA3

211 drohC pmoccA4

312 drohC pmoccA5

413 drohC pmoccA6

514 drohC pmoccA7

615 drohC pmoccA8

SONG

SYSTEM

1 MIDI Recorder System Track Upper 1

2 MIDI Recorder System Track Upper 2

3 MIDI Recorder System Track Lower 1

4 MIDI Recorder System Track Lower 2

5 MIDI Recorder System Track Auto Harmonize

6 MIDI Recorder Phrase PAD 1

7 MIDI Recorder Phrase PAD 2

8 MIDI Recorder Phrase PAD 3

9 MIDI Recorder Phrase PAD 4

1SONG

SOLO

1 MIDI Recorder Solo Track 1 / MIDI In 1ch

hc2 nI IDIM / 2 kcarT oloS redroceR IDIM22

hc51 nI IDIM / 51 kcarT oloS redroceR IDIM5151

hc61 nI IDIM / 61 kcarT oloS redroceR IDIM6161

*1 See “External MIDI Device

Operations by the Digital

Keyboard” below.

Accomp Out*1

MIDI OUT

Channel*1

MIDI IN

Channel

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 144 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-145

Reference

■External MIDI Device Operations by the Digital Keyboard

• For the MIDI OUT channel of keyboard performance data output, the n-value specified by “Keyboard Channel” (page EN-125) is

applied to the Upper 1 part. MIDI OUT channels for the following are based on the MIDI OUT channel of the Upper 1 part: Upper

2 = n+1, Lower 1 = n+2, Lower 2 = n+3, and Auto Harmonize = n+4.

• While the “Accomp Out” (page EN-125) setting is turned on, the performance data of the Auto Accompaniment parts is output to

MIDI OUT channels CH9 through CH16.

AC Adaptor Handling Precautions

Model: AD-E24250LW/AD-A12150LW

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions on hand.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this product near water.

6. Clean only with a dry cloth.

7. Do not install near radiators, heat registers, stoves, or any other source of heat (including amplifiers).

8. Use only attachments and accessories specified by the manufacturer.

9. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required after any of the following occurs: when the product

is damaged, when the power supply cord or plug is damaged, when liquid is spilled into the product, when a foreign

object falls into the product, when the product is exposed to rain or moisture, when the product does not operate

normally, when the product is dropped.

10. Do not allow the product to be exposed to dripping or splashing liquid. Do not place any object containing liquid on the

product.

11. Do not allow the electrical load output to exceed the label rating.

12. Make sure the surrounding area is dry before plugging into a power source.

13. Make sure the product is oriented correctly.

14. Unplug the product during lightning storms or when you do not plan to use it for a long time.

15. Do not allow product ventilation openings to become blocked. Install the product in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

16. Take care the power cord is located where it will not be stepped upon or bent severely, particularly in locations close to

plugs and convenience receptacles, and in locations where it exits from the product.

17. The AC adaptor should be plugged into a power outlet as close to the product as possible to allow immediate

disconnection of the plug in case of emergency.

The symbol below is an alert indicating un-insulated hazardous voltage inside the product’s enclosure, which may be

sufficient to constitute the risk of electric shock to users.

’

The symbol below is an alert indicating the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

documentation that accompanies the product.

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 145 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

EN-146

Reference

Be sure to read and observe the following operating precautions.

■Location

Avoid the following locations for this product.

• Areas exposed to direct sunlight and high humidity

• Areas subjected to temperature extremes

• Near a radio, TV, video deck, or tuner

The above devices will not cause malfunction of the product, but interference from the product can cause audio or video

interference of a nearby device.

■User Maintenance

• Never use benzine, alcohol, thinner, or other chemical agents to clean the product.

• To clean the product or its keyboard, wipe with a soft cloth moistened in a weak solution of water and a mild neutral detergent.

Wring all excess moisture from the cloth before wiping.

■Included and Optional Accessories

Use only accessories that are specified for use with this product. Use of unauthorized accessories creates the risk of fire, electric

shock, and personal injury.

■Weld Lines

Lines may be visible on the exterior of the product. These are “weld lines” that result from the plastic molding process. They are not

cracks or scratches.

■Musical Instrument Etiquette

Always be aware of others around you whenever using this product. Be especially careful when playing late at night to keep the

volume at levels that do not disturb others. Other steps you can take when playing late at night are closing the window and using

headphones.

Operating Precautions

CTX5000_3000_EN.book 146 ページ２０１８年２月２６日　月曜日　午後３時５６分

A-1

Appendix/Apéndice

Song List/Lista de canciones

No./Nº Title/Título

WORLD (CATEGORY : 01)

001 WHEN THE SAINTS GO MARCHING IN

002 AMAZING GRACE

003 HOME ON THE RANGE

004 SANTA LUCIA

005 WALTZING MATILDA

006 CAMPTOWN RACES

PIANO/CLASSICS (CATEGORY : 02)

007 JE TE VEUX

008 SONATA op.13 “PATHÉTIQUE” 2nd Mov.

009 HABANERA FROM “CARMEN”

010 MINUET IN G MAJOR

011 ODE TO JOY

012 GYMNOPÉDIES no.1

013 FÜR ELISE

014 TURKISH MARCH (MOZART)

015 ETUDE op.10 no.3 “CHANSON DE L’ADIEU”

016 THE ENTERTAINER

017 FRÖHLICHER LANDMANN

018 LA CHEVALERESQUE

019 SONATA K.545 1st Mov.

020 LA PRIÈRE D’UNE VIERGE

021 VALSE op.64 no.1 “PETIT CHIEN”

022 LIEBESTRÄUME no.3

023 JESUS BLEIBET MEINE FREUDE

024 CANON (PACHELBEL)

025 SERENADE FROM “EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK”

026 MARCH FROM “THE NUTCRACKER”

027 LA FILLE AUX CHEVEUX DE LIN

028 HUMORESKE (DVOŘÁK)

029 TRÄUMEREI

030 NOCTURNE op.9 no.2 (CHOPIN)

USER RECORDS (CATEGORY : 03)

031 - 040 USER RECORD 1 - 10

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 1 ページ２０１８年３月２６日　月曜日　午後６時１８分

Appendix/Apéndice

A-2

*1 With FINGERED 2, interpreted as Am7.

*2 With FINGERED 2, interpreted as Am7b5.

*3 Inverted form not supported in some cases.

*4 Chord consisting of root and 5th only.

*5 Not a standard chord, but used when you want Auto

Accompaniment with the root note only, or the root with an

octave added.

*1 Con FINGERED 2, se interpreta como Am7.

*2 Con FINGERED 2, se interpreta como Am7b5.

*3 En algunos casos no se puede usar la forma invertida.

*4 Acorde formado por la nota fundamental y 5ª solamente.

*5 No es un acorde estándar, pero se utiliza para el

acompañamiento automático con la nota fundamental

solamente, o la nota fundamental con una octava añadida.

Fingering Guide/

Guía de digitación

FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2 Chords/

Acordes FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2

Cdim

Caug *3

C5

Csus4 *3

Csus2 *3

CmM7

Cdim7 *3

C6 *1 *3

Cm6 *2 *3

CaugM7

CdimM7

Caug7

Cm7 *3

CM7

Cm75 *3

CM75

C7sus4

C75 *3

Cmadd9

C69 *3

Cm7(9)

Cm69 *3

Cadd9

C7(9)

C7(#9)

C7(#11)

CM7(9)

Cm7(11) *3

CmM7(9)

C7(13)

C7(13)

C8 *5

C7(9)

C5 *4

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 2 ページ２０１８年３月２６日　月曜日　午後６時１８分

A-3

Appendix/Apéndice

In addition to the chords that can be fingered with

FINGERED 1 and FINGERED 2, the following chords also are

recognized.

Además de los acordes que se pueden digital con

FINGERED 1 y FINGERED 2, también se pueden reconocer

los siguientes acordes.

• With FINGERED ON BASS, the lowest note fingered is

interpreted as the base note. Inverted forms are not

supported.

• With FULL RANGE CHORD, when the lowest note fingered

is a certain distance from the neighboring note, the chord is

interpreted as a fraction chord.

• Unlike FINGERED 1, 2, and FINGERED ON BASS, FULL

RANGE CHORD requires pressing of at least three keys to

form a chord.

• Con FINGERED ON BASS, la nota más baja digitada se

interpreta como nota base. No se pueden usar formas

invertidas.

• Con FULL RANGE CHORD, cuando la nota más baja

digitada se encuentre a cierta distancia de la nota

adyacente, el acorde se interpreta como un acorde

fraccional.

• A diferencia de FINGERED 1, 2 y FINGERED ON BASS,

FULL RANGE CHORD se requiere la pulsación de tres

teclas como mínimo para formar un acorde.

FINGERED ON BASS, FULL RANGE CHORD/

FINGERED ON BASS, FULL RANGE CHORD





Ddim

Fdim

FM7







Gdim

Adim

Bdim



Fm7





zzzzz zz z z z

zz zz zz z





zzzzz zz

Gm7



add9

zz z z



dim



dim



dim

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 3 ページ２０１８年３月２６日　月曜日　午後６時１８分

A-4

Appendix/Apéndice

Chord Example List/Lista de ejemplos de acordes

dim

aug

sus4

sus2

m7b

7sus4

add9

madd9

mM7

dim7

(A#)/BbBF#/(Gb)G(G#)/AbAFCC

#/(Db)D(D#)/EbE

• You can use the split point to change the size of the accompaniment keyboard range (page EN-20, 50). *1 Root *2 Chord Type

• Puede usar el punto de división para cambiar el tamaño del rango del teclado de acompañamiento (página EN-20, 50). *1 Raíz *2 Tipo de acorde

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 4 ページ２０１８年３月２６日　月曜日　午後６時１８分

A-5

Appendix/Apéndice

Block Diagram/Diagrama de bloques

*1 Volume/Pan

*2 Chorus Send

*3 Delay Send

*4 Reverb Send

MIC IN (CT-X5000)

AUDIO IN

SPEAKER

PHONES

LINE OUT*5

*5 CT-X5000

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 5 ページ２０１８年３月２６日　月曜日　午後６時１８分

1 2

bo bp bq br bs bt ck

bk9

bm bn

cq crcm cp dk dl

dm dnct

cocncl

cs do dp dq dr ds

4 5 67 8

CT-X5000

• Cut this page along the dashed line so you can have it on hand as you read the contents of the manual.

• Recorte esta página por la línea de puntos para tenerla a mano mientras continúa leyendo este manual.

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 6 ページ２０１７年１２月２６日　火曜日　午後６時３２分

1 2

bo bp bq br bs bt ck

bk9

bm bn

cq crcm cp dk dl

ek dm dnct

cocncl

cs do dp dq dr ds

4 5 67 8

CT-X3000

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 7 ページ２０１７年１２月２６日　火曜日　午後６時３２分

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

1 - 16

Default

Changed

Note

Number

0 - 127

0 - 127 *1

12 - 120

True voice

After

Touch

Control

Change

Pitch Bender

Key’s

Ch’s

Velocity

9nH v = 1 - 127

8nH v = 0 - 127, 9nH v = 0

9nH v = 1 - 127

8nH v = 0 - 127

Note ON

Note OFF

Mode

Mode 3

Default

Messages

Altered

6, 38

Bank select

Modulation

Portamento Time

Data entry LSB, MSB

Volume

Pan

Expression

Hold 1

Portamento Switch

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Filter resonance

Release time

Attack time

Filter cutoff

Vibrato rate

Vibrato depth

Models: CT-X5000 / CT-X3000 Version : 1.0

CT-X5000:

, CT-X3000:

MIDI Implementation Chart

CTX5000_3000_ES.book 6 ページ２０１８年３月２６日　月曜日　午後６時１８分

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

1 - 16

Default

Changed

Note

Number

0 - 127

0 - 127 *1

12 - 120

True voice

Program

Change

0 - 127

:True #

After

Touch

Control

Change

Pitch Bender

System Exclusive

Key’s

Ch’s

Velocity

9nH v = 1 - 127

8nH v = 0 - 127, 9nH v = 0

9nH v = 1 - 127

8nH v = 0 - 127

Note ON

Note OFF

Mode

Mode 3

Default

Messages

Altered

System

Common

: Song Pos

: Song Sel

: Tune

Aux

Messages

Remarks

: All sound off

Reset all controller

: Local ON/OFF

: All notes OFF

: Active Sense

: Reset

System

Real Time

: Clock

: Commands

6, 38

100, 101

Bank select

Modulation

Portamento Time

Data entry LSB, MSB

Volume

Pan

Expression

Hold 1

Portamento Switch

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Filter resonance

Release time

Attack time

Filter cutoff

Vibrato rate

Vibrato depth

Vibrato delay

Portamento Control

Reverb send level

Chorus send level

Delay send level

RPN LSB, MSB

Models: CT-X5000 / CT-X3000 Version : 1.0

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes

X : No

CT-X5000:

, CT-X3000:

*1: Depends on tone.

*2: For details about RPN and system exclusive

messages, see MIDI Implementation at

http://world.casio.com/.

*3: In accordance with pedal effect setting.

*4: Output along with certain operations.

*1: Depende del tono.

*2: Para obtener información acerca de RPN y los

mensajes exclusivos del sistema, consulte

Implementación MIDI en

http://world.casio.com/.

*3: De acuerdo con el ajuste de efecto de pedal.

*4: Se genera junto con determinadas operaciones.

CTX5000_3000_es_Cover1-4.fm 2 ページ２０１８年２月１５日　木曜日　午後４時５９分

EN/ES

CTX3000-ES-1B

USER’S GUIDE

Safety Precautions

Before trying to use the Digital Keyboard, be sure to read the separate “Safety Precautions”.

Please keep all information for future reference.

GUÍA DEL USUARIO

Precauciones de seguridad

Antes de intentar usar el teclado digital, asegúrese de leer las “Precauciones de seguridad” separadas.

Guarde toda la información para futuras consultas.

About Music Score data

You can use a computer to download music score data from the CASIO Website. For more information, visit the

URL below.

http://world.casio.com/

Acerca de los datos de partituras

Puede utilizar un PC para descargar los datos de partituras desde el sitio web de CASIO. Para obtener más

información, visite la siguiente URL.

http://world.casio.com/

CT-X5000

CT-X3000

This recycle mark indicates that the packaging conforms to

the environmental protection legislation in Germany.

Esta marca de reciclaje indica que el empaquetado se

ajusta a la legislación de protección ambiental en Alemania.

MA1804-B Printed in China

CTX5000_3000_es_Cover1-4.fm 1 ページ２０１８年２月１５日　木曜日　午後４時５９分

Casio CTX5000_3000_EN Web_CTX3000 ES 1B Web CTX3000 EN

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation